INCON CNC Series

INCON–M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S)

Milling CNC Controller

User Manual

Version 5.11, 33th Edition, 2020 / 10 / 16

2017 by Intek Technology Co., Ltd.

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or
otherwise, or be used to make any derivative work (such as translation or adaptation), without prior
permission in writing from Intek Technology.
Intek Technology reserves the right to revise this publication and make changes from time to time
in its content without notice.

Intek Technology
No.58, Xingong 3rd Rd., Zhubei City, Hsinchu County 302, Taiwan (R.O.C.)
TEL: 886-3-555-5623
FAX: 886-3-555-5604
E-mail: [email protected]
Website: www.intek.com.tw
support.intek.com.tw
2 / 353
In this manual, we have done our best to write and double check all information to

ensure its correctness. However, due to the enormous amount of information and

situations, we cannot possibly include everything that should be done or should not

be done, or describe everything possible or impossible in it. Therefore, anything that is

not described as should be done will be regarded as should not be done, and anything

that is not described as possible will be treated as impossible.

Intek Technology reserves the right to modify the content of this manual without

further notice.

The proprietary of the content of this manual belongs to Intek Technology. No part of

this manual may be reproduced or republished in any form without further consent.

3 / 353
Limitation of Liability Statement

In no event shall Intek Technology be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental or

consequential damages, arising out of the precision, loss or damage caused by any

particular person or any person arising out of or in connection with the use of Intek

Technology's products, information or services directly or indirectly.

Without limiting the generality of the above provisions and in any event, Intek

Technology shall not be liable to you for any kind of damage caused by any particular

person or any person arising out of or in connection with the use of Intek Technology's

products, information or services directly or indirectly Including, but not limited to, loss

of profits, business obstruction, or other economic loss.

4 / 353
Preface

INCON-M470/M670/M675 are new generation CNC controllers for 4-axes/6-axes

machining/engraving center of Intek Technology. Every controller consists of several

modules, which are designed with highly advanced IC circuits and environmental

friendly concept to make the controller small in size, low in power consumption and

high in recyclability, and still holds the persistent characteristics of stability, reliability

and maintainability of INCON series controllers.

All INCON series controllers are closed-loop CNC system. INCON-M470 supports 4
axes interpolation and 1 spindle, and INCON-M670 supports 6 axes interpolation and
2 spindles.

INCON-M675 is a brand-new developed, real 5-axis milling CNC controller. It is

equipped with dual-core hardware and has the features of high-speed and low-heat.
It not only inherits the advantages of its predecessors, it also provides RTCP (Real Time
Rotating Center Point Transform) and TWP (Tilted Working Plane) functions. INCON-
M675 supports six machine structures and three 5-axis CNC programming forms,
which makes machining flawless.

INCON-M470/M670/M675 supports complete sets of G, M, S, T codes for

programming, and complete compensation mechanism, FTP server, and USB file
system support.

The contents which are only available for certain controller type only will be marked
with the symbols listed below:
：M470
：M670
：M675
：M470/M670
：M670/M675

5 / 353
Functions of INCON-M470S/M670S/M675S are the same as INCON-
M470/M670/M675. However, It also supports TCP server function. For further
information of communication protocols INCON S series controller, please refer to
IClient Programming Manual.

This manual contains the controller operation, user parameters, and NC codes of
INCON-M470/M670/M675. It also applies to INCON-M470S/M670S/M675S. In this
manual, INCON- M470/M670/M675 is used to represent INCON- M470/M670/M675
and INCON-M470S/M670S/M675S.

The help system in the controller has also built in most information in this manual. User
can access it simply by pressing F1 at anytime to show context sensitive contents of
current operation. Also, by pressing F2 and selecting Help menu item will pull down
the Help Menu. By selecting Topic can show a brief content like this manual, and
selecting Code Index will show a summary of G/M codes and some examples. Also in
this book are some programming examples and figures for user reference.

Intek technology offers limited technical support which is defined in business

agreements. Also, by registering as a member in our technical support website
(http://support.intek.com.tw), user can download controller related technical
documents or leave a message in bulletin board and our customer service personnel
will be gladly in touch with you.

6 / 353
Content

1 Screen and Operational ........................................................................................... 17

1.1 Operational Panel .............................................................................................. 17
1.1.1 Operation Panel Button Introduction ............................................................ 17
1.1.2 Abbreviation Keys ....................................................................................... 18
1.1.3 Operator Panel Auxiliary Keys ...................................................................... 18
1.1.4 Dialog Box Field/Item to Switch and Modify .................................................. 19
1.1.5 Shortcut Keys ............................................................................................. 20
1.1.5.1 Status shortcut ..................................................................................... 20
1.1.5.2 Program editing shortcut keys ............................................................... 22
1.2 Screen Display .................................................................................................. 23
1.2.1 Pull-down Menu Bar .................................................................................... 25
1.2.2 Program Window ........................................................................................ 25
1.2.3 System State Window ................................................................................. 26
1.2.4 Position State Window ................................................................................. 29
1.2.5 Diagnosis Pages .......................................................................................... 31
1.2.6 Manual Control Window............................................................................... 32
1.2.7 Graph Mode ................................................................................................ 33
1.2.7.1 3D Path Mode (3D X-Y-Z) ...................................................................... 34
1.2.7.2 Dual Dimensional (X-Y and X-Z) Plane Path Mode (X-Y & X-Z) ................. 34
1.2.7.3 2D Path Mode (2D X-Y) ......................................................................... 35
1.2.8 MDI ........................................................................................................... 36
1.2.8.1 MDI Dialogue Box ................................................................................. 36
1.2.8.2 Multi-Line MDI Edit Window .................................................................. 37
1.3 Environment and Maintenance Precautions ...................................................... 39
1.3.1 Working Environment .............................................................................. 39
1.3.2 Maintenance Precautions .......................................................................... 39
2 Pull-down Menus ..................................................................................................... 41
2.1 File Management (F2→F) .................................................................................. 41
2.1.1 New ........................................................................................................... 41
2.1.2 Open .......................................................................................................... 41
2.1.2.1 Long File Name..................................................................................... 42
2.1.2.2 File Previewing ..................................................................................... 42
2.1.3 Save .......................................................................................................... 43
2.1.4 Save As ...................................................................................................... 43
2.1.5 Delete File .................................................................................................. 44
2.1.6 Import File From USB .................................................................................. 45
2.1.7 System Shutdown ....................................................................................... 45
2.2 Program Editing (F2→E) .................................................................................... 46
2.2.1 Clipboard .................................................................................................... 46
2.2.1.1 Clipboard Function ................................................................................ 46

7 / 353
 2.2.1.2 Clipboard Shortcut Keys ........................................................................ 47
2.2.3 Replace ...................................................................................................... 47
2.2.2 Find ........................................................................................................ 48
2.2.4 Go to Line .................................................................................................. 48
2.2.5 Command Insertion Aid ............................................................................... 49
2.2.5.1 Path Related Commands (Positioning, Linear Interpolation, Circular
Interpolation)................................................................................................... 50
2.2.5.1.1 Positioning (G00) ............................................................................ 50
2.2.5.1.2 Linear Interpolation (G01) ............................................................... 51
2.2.5.1.3 Circular Interpolation (G02/G03)...................................................... 53
2.2.5.2 Cancycle .............................................................................................. 55
2.2.5.3 Drill Pattern .......................................................................................... 56
2.2.5.3.1 Line Drill Pattern ............................................................................. 57
2.2.5.3.2 Grid Drill Pattern ............................................................................. 58
2.2.5.3.3 Arc Drill Pattern .............................................................................. 60
2.2.5.4 Object Pattern ...................................................................................... 62
2.2.5.4.1 Line Object Pattern ......................................................................... 62
2.2.5.4.2 Grid Object Pattern ......................................................................... 63
2.2.5.4.3 Arc Object Pattern .......................................................................... 65
2.2.5.5 Pocket/Dowel/Side Surfacing Machining Commands ................................ 66
2.2.5.6 Pocket Machining .................................................................................. 67
2.2.5.6.1 Rectangular Pocket Machining ......................................................... 69
2.2.5.6.2 Circular Pocket Machining................................................................ 71
2.2.5.7 Dowel Machining .................................................................................. 72
2.2.5.7.1 Rectangular Dowel Machining .......................................................... 73
2.2.5.7.2 Circular Dowel Machining ................................................................ 74
2.2.5.8 Side Surfacing Machining....................................................................... 76
2.2.5.8.1 Rectangular Side Surfacing .............................................................. 77
2.2.5.8.2 Circular Side Surfacing .................................................................... 78
2.2.5.9 Surfacing Machining .............................................................................. 80
2.2.5.10 Contour Pocket Side Surfacing Machining ............................................. 82
2.2.6 Command Modification Aid .......................................................................... 84
2.2.7 Teach In..................................................................................................... 84
2.2.8 Compute Radius.......................................................................................... 85
2.3 Program Running (F2→R).................................................................................. 85
2.3.1 Run Program .............................................................................................. 86
2.3.2 Run from Middle ......................................................................................... 86
2.3.3 Simulate ..................................................................................................... 89
2.3.4 Stop ........................................................................................................... 89
2.3.5 Hold ........................................................................................................... 89
2.3.6 Step ........................................................................................................... 90
2.3.7 Conditional Hold ......................................................................................... 90
2.3.8 Machine Lock .............................................................................................. 91

8 / 353
 2.3.9 Spindle Axis Lock ........................................................................................ 91
2.3.10 Dry Run .................................................................................................... 91
2.3.11 Block skip ................................................................................................. 92
2.3.12 Optional Hold ............................................................................................ 92
2.3.13 MDI.......................................................................................................... 92
2.3.13.1 Call MDI Dialog Box in Manual Mode .................................................... 93
2.3.14 DNC ......................................................................................................... 93
2.3.15 DNC M30 Nonstop ..................................................................................... 94
2.3.15.1 Show Run File List............................................................................... 95
2.3.16 Graphics ................................................................................................... 95
2.4 Manual Mode (F2→M) ....................................................................................... 96
2.4.1 Inc: Incremental Moves ............................................................................... 96
2.4.2 Jog: Continuous Moves................................................................................ 96
2.4.3 Wheel: Hand Wheel .................................................................................... 96
2.4.4 Home: Home Return ................................................................................... 97
2.4.5 Relative Position Reset ................................................................................ 98
2.4.6 Teach-in Program Position ........................................................................... 98
2.4.7 Angle Axis Program Position Teaching Setting ............................................... 99
2.4.8 Quick Manual Setting Tool Length ................................................................ 99
2.4.9 Hold-Normal Manual ................................................................................. 100
2.4.10 Manual Retract in Normal Direction .......................................................... 100
2.4.11 Set G158 Offset in Manual Mode .............................................................. 101
2.5 Parameter (F2→P) .......................................................................................... 102
2.5.1 Attribute ................................................................................................... 105
2.5.1.1 Check Item......................................................................................... 105
2.5.1.1.1 ESC to save modified program ....................................................... 105
2.5.1.1.2 Error message for tool compensation overcut ................................. 106
2.5.1.1.3 Arc corner for tool compensation ................................................... 106
2.5.1.1.4 Treat no dot as with dot................................................................ 106
2.5.1.1.5 Message for closing manual window .............................................. 106
2.5.1.1.6 Not switch graph plane automatically (END key) ............................. 106
2.5.1.1.7 On startup, reopen the last CNC file used ....................................... 107
2.5.1.1.8 CS to run Hard Disk DNC............................................................... 107
2.5.1.1.9 Esc to close parameter dialog ........................................................ 107
2.5.1.1.10 On startup, use Macro Type B ..................................................... 107
2.5.1.1.11 Use Type B Tool Compensation ................................................... 108
2.5.1.2 Language ........................................................................................... 108
2.5.1.3 Time Zone .......................................................................................... 108
2.5.1.4 Address .............................................................................................. 108
2.5.1.5 Screen Saver Delay (Minute) ............................................................... 109
2.5.1.6 Max G60 Turn Angle ........................................................................... 110
2.5.1.7 Speed Down Ratio .............................................................................. 110
2.5.2 Coordinate Offsets .................................................................................... 111
2.5.3 Reference Positions ................................................................................... 112

9 / 353
 2.5.4 Tool Table ................................................................................................ 113
2.5.5 Tool Length Measurement ......................................................................... 115
2.5.6 4th Axis .................................................................................................... 115
2.5.7 Cancycle Parameters ................................................................................. 116
2.5.8 Macro Variable Table ................................................................................. 117
2.5.9 Scaling Magnitudes ................................................................................... 117
2.5.10 Rotation Angle ........................................................................................ 118
2.5.11 Extra G54 Coordinate Offsets ................................................................... 118
2.5.12 Extra Attribute ........................................................................................ 119
2.5.13 G158 Coordinate Offsets .......................................................................... 122
2.5.14 5 Axes Attribute ...................................................................................... 124
2.5.15 Run State ............................................................................................... 126
2.5.16 Teach In Axis .......................................................................................... 127
2.5.17 User Management ................................................................................... 128
2.5.17.1 Tool Life Table .................................................................................. 128
2.5.17.2 Tool Compensation ........................................................................... 129
2.5.17.3 Password .......................................................................................... 135
2.5.17.4 Management .................................................................................... 136
2.5.17.5 Show Event Record ........................................................................... 137
2.5.17.6 Save User Parameter ......................................................................... 138
2.5.17.7 Load User Parameter......................................................................... 138
2.5.17.8 List User Parameter ........................................................................... 139
2.5.17.9 Related Machine Data ....................................................................... 140
2.5.18 User Defined Machine Data ...................................................................... 141
2.6 Help (F2→H) .................................................................................................. 142
2.6.1 Topic ........................................................................................................ 143
2.6.2 Code Index ............................................................................................... 143
2.6.3 Quick Guide .............................................................................................. 143
2.6.4 How to Use Help ....................................................................................... 144
2.6.5 About INCON-M470/INCON-M670/INCON-M675 ......................................... 145
2.6.6 About Machine .......................................................................................... 146
2.6.7 Authorisation Instruction ........................................................................... 146
2.7 Safety Level .................................................................................................... 147
2.7.1 Safety Level 3 ........................................................................................... 148
2.7.2 Safety Level 2 ........................................................................................... 150
2.7.3 Safety Level 1 ........................................................................................... 152
2.7.4 Safety Level 0 ........................................................................................... 155
2.8 USB Function .................................................................................................. 155
3 Programming Codes .............................................................................................. 159
3.1 Definition of Programs and Blocks .................................................................... 159
3.2 G Codes ......................................................................................................... 159
3.2.1 G code table Symbol Description ................................................................ 160
3.2.2 G codes for Status Change ........................................................................ 160
3.2.3 G codes for Axial Motion ............................................................................ 162

10 / 353
 3.2.4 Other G codes .......................................................................................... 165
3.2.5 G code supplement ................................................................................... 167
3.3 M Codes ......................................................................................................... 168
3.3.1 M code table Symbol Description ............................................................... 168
3.3.2 M code that controls program execution ..................................................... 168
3.3.3 Spindle, tool change and other controlled M code ....................................... 169
3.3.4 Additional Instructions for M Codes ............................................................ 169
3.4 Position and Feed Commands .......................................................................... 170
3.4.1 G00/G53: Rapid Traverse/Rapid Traverse in Machine Coordinate System ..... 170
3.4.2 G01: Linear Interpolation........................................................................... 171
3.4.3 G31/G31.1: Conditional Linear Interpolation ............................................... 173
3.4.4 G02/G03: CW/CCW Circular Interpolation ................................................... 174
3.4.4.1 Definition of G02/G03 ......................................................................... 174
3.4.4.2 Format of G02/G03 ............................................................................. 175
3.4.4.3 Program Example of G02/G03 ............................................................. 179
3.4.5 G33: Threading......................................................................................... 180
3.5 Tool Compensation Commands ........................................................................ 181
3.5.1 G43/G49: Tool Length Compensation/Cancel Tool Length Compensation ...... 181
3.5.2 G37: Automatic Tool Length Measurement ................................................. 182
3.5.2.1 Two-stage Automatic Tool Length Measurement ................................... 184
3.5.2.2 G37 Can Designate Non Spindle Parallel Axis to Do Automatic Tool Length
Measurement ................................................................................................. 185
3.5.3 G40/G41/G42: Tool Radius Compensation .................................................. 186
3.5.3.1 G41/G42: Start-up of Tool Radius Compensation .................................. 188
3.5.3.2 G41/G42: During Tool Radius Compensation ........................................ 189
3.5.3.3 G40: Cancelling Tool Radius Compensation .......................................... 192
3.6 Drilling, boring or tapping related can cycle instructions .................................... 192
3.6.1 G98/G99: Can cycle command returns original starting height/reference height R
point ................................................................................................................. 192
3.6.2 G80: Cancel can cycle instructions ............................................................. 195
3.6.3 G81/G82, G73/G83: drilling can cycle ......................................................... 196
3.6.3.1 G81/G82: Drilling Cycle/Drilling Cycle with Dwell ................................... 196
3.6.3.2 G73/G83: High Speed Peck Drilling Cycle/Peck Drilling Cycle with Chip
Breaking ........................................................................................................ 197
3.6.4 G85/G86, G76/G87, G88, G89: Boring can cycle ........................................ 199
3.6.4.1 G85/G86: Boring Cycle/Boring Cycle with Spindle Stop .......................... 199
3.6.4.2 G76/G87: Fine Boring Cycle/Fine Back Boring Cycle .............................. 200
3.6.4.3 G88: Boring Cycle with Dwell and Manual Retraction ............................. 202
3.6.4.4 G89: Boring Cycle with Dwell ............................................................... 202
3.6.5 G74/G84: Tapping can cycle ...................................................................... 203
3.6.5.1 Rigid Tapping ..................................................................................... 204
3.6.6 Special application of can cycle instructions (K0) ......................................... 206
3.7 Rotation, Mirroring and Scaling Commands ....................................................... 207
3.8 Spindle Control Commands .............................................................................. 210

11 / 353
 3.8.1 M03/M04/M05: Spindle On Clockwise/Spindle On Counterclockwise/Spindle Stop
........................................................................................................................ 210
3.8.2 S Code: Spindle Speed Setting ................................................................... 210
3.8.3 G96/G97: Constant Surface Speed Control/Constant Surface Speed Control
Cancellation ...................................................................................................... 211
3.8.4 G93: Inverse Time Feed ............................................................................ 211
3.8.5 G94/G95: Feed rate control per minute/per revolution ................................ 213
3.9 Units and Position Commands .......................................................................... 215
3.9.1 G17/G18/G19: Plane Selection ................................................................... 215
3.9.2 G20/G21: Programming in Imperial/Metric.................................................. 215
3.9.3 G90/G91: Absolute Programming/Incremental Programming ....................... 216
3.9.4 G15/G16: Cartesian Coordinate System/Polar Coordinate System ................. 217
3.9.5 G54~G59: Select Work Coordinate System ................................................. 221
3.9.6 G54.1: Extra G54 Coordinate System Offsets .............................................. 221
3.9.7 G52: Set Sub-coordinate System ................................................................ 222
3.9.8 G92: Set Zero Point................................................................................... 223
3.10 Program Execution Related Commands ........................................................... 224
3.10.1 G04: Dwell.............................................................................................. 224
3.10.2 G09: Non-modal Exact Stop Check ........................................................... 224
3.10.3 G60/G61: Exact Stop Check Mode Cancellation/Exact Stop Check Mode ..... 225
3.10.4 M00/M01/M100/M101/M02/M30: Program Stop/Program End .................... 225
3.10.4.1 M00: Program Stop ........................................................................... 226
3.10.4.2 M01: Optional Program Stop .............................................................. 226
3.10.4.3 M100/M101: Program Stop for Manual Feed/Optional Program Stop for
Manual Feed .................................................................................................. 226
3.10.4.4 M02: Program End, Cursor Returns to the End of the Program............. 227
3.10.4.5 M30: Program End, Cursor Returns to the Start of the Program ........... 227
3.10.5 M95/M97/M98/M99: Sectional Program Cycle/Subprogram Call .................. 227
3.10.5.1 M95: Sectional Program Cycle ............................................................ 228
3.10.5.2 M97: Internal Subprogram Call .......................................................... 229
3.10.5.3 M98: External Subprogram Call .......................................................... 232
3.10.5.4 M99: Return from Subprogram .......................................................... 233
3.10.6 M Code Function ..................................................................................... 234
3.11 Reference Position Related Commands ........................................................... 235
3.11.1 G28: Return to Reference Position ........................................................... 236
3.11.2 G29: Return from Reference Position........................................................ 237
3.11.3 G30: Return to 2nd, 3rd or 4th Reference Position .................................... 237
3.12 Other Commands .......................................................................................... 238
3.12.1 M06: Tool Change ................................................................................... 238
3.12.2 M08/M09: Coolant On/Coolant Off ........................................................... 239
3.12.3 T Code: Tool Number Change and Tool Selection ...................................... 239
3.12.4 G10/G11: Parameter Settings Mode/Parameter Settings Mode Cancellation 240
3.12.4.1 Other Applications of G10/G11 Command ........................................... 241
3.12.5 G10.01/G11.01: Sub Spindle Selection/ Main Spindle Selection .................. 243

12 / 353
 3.12.6 G10.02/G11.02: Follow Axis/Follow Axis Cancellation ................................ 244
3.12.7 G10.03/G11.03: Coordinate System Mapping/Coordinate System Mapping
Cancellation ...................................................................................................... 244
3.12.8 G10.04/G11.04: Machine Coordinate Offset/Machine Coordinate Offset
Cancellation ...................................................................................................... 246
3.12.9 G10.07/G11.07: Rotary Axis Shortest Path Mode/Rotary Axis Shortest Path Mode
Cancellation ...................................................................................................... 247
3.12.10 G10.10: HSHP Parameter Selects ........................................................... 248
3.12.11 G10.37/G11.37: Save and Set Tool Length Compensation and Tool Length
Wear Values ...................................................................................................... 248
3.12.12 G10.38/G11.38: Save and Set Tool Radius Compensation and Tool Radius Wear
Values .............................................................................................................. 249
3.12.13 G10.39/G11.39: Save and Set Tool Life Table Parameters ........................ 250
3.12.14 G10.54/G11.54: Work Coordinate System Offset and G54 Extra Work
Coordinate System Offset................................................................................... 251
3.12.14.1 Set Macro Variable Values to Work Coordinate System Offset Values .. 251
3.12.14.2 Save Work Coordinate System Offset Values to Macro Variable Values 252
3.12.14.3 Set Macro Variable Values to G54 Extra Work Coordinate System Offset
Values (G54.1 P001~P128) ............................................................................. 254
3.12.14.4 Save G54 Extra Work Coordinate System Offset Values (G54.1 P001~P128)
to Macro Variable Values ................................................................................ 254
3.12.15 G10.60/G11.60: Macro smooth mode/Macro smooth mode cancellation .... 255
3.12.16 G10.65/G11.65: Switch to Macro Type A/B ............................................. 255
3.12.17 G10.66/G11.66: Tiny Line Segments Connecting Function On/Off............. 255
3.12.18 G71.01/G71.00: 4th-axis Rotation Angle On/ 4th-axis Rotation Angle Off .. 256
3.12.18.1 4th-axis Rotation Angle On .............................................................. 256
3.12.18.2 4th-axis Rotation Angle Off .............................................................. 263
3.12.19 G65: Call Macro Subprogram.................................................................. 263
3.12.20 PRM Command ..................................................................................... 265
3.12.21 G10L52 Set 5 Axis Rotary Mechanism ..................................................... 267
3.13 5-axis Commands (INCON-M675 Only) ........................................................... 268
3.13.1 G168/G169: RTCP On/Off ........................................................................ 268
3.13.2 G178/G179: G00 RTCP On/Off ................................................................. 269
3.13.3 G158: Tilted Working Plane ..................................................................... 269
3.13.4 G128: Tool Retraction ............................................................................. 270
3.14 Programming Examples (M–series) ................................................................. 270
3.14.1 Example of Work Coordinate System: G54~G59........................................ 271
3.14.2 Example of Sub-coordinate System: G52 .................................................. 272
3.14.3 Example of Tool Length Compensation: G43 ............................................. 273
3.14.4 Example of Tool Radius Compensation: G41/G42 ...................................... 273
3.14.5 Example of Polar Coordinate System: G16 ................................................ 275
3.14.6 Other Examples: ..................................................................................... 278
3.14.7 Example of Mirroring and Coordinate Syetem Rotation: G51/G68 ............... 280
3.14.8 Example of Boring and Drilling Cycle: G73~G89 ........................................ 283
3.14.9 Example of Pocket Machining: G70.00/70.01 ............................................ 285

13 / 353
 3.14.10 Example of Gird Object Pattern Machining: G70.22 .................................. 285
4 INCON-M675......................................................................................................... 287
4.1 INCON-M675 Introduction ............................................................................... 287
4.1.1 About INCON-M675 5-axis CNC controller ................................................... 287
4.1.2 Introduction of 5-axis Machining ................................................................ 287
4.1.3 Machine Types .......................................................................................... 289
4.1.4 5-axis Axial Definition ................................................................................ 291
4.2 Programming and Usage ................................................................................. 291
4.2.1 Programming and coordinate format .......................................................... 291
4.2.2 5-axis Coordinate Offsets .......................................................................... 293
4.2.3 5-axis special 3D teaching function ............................................................ 294
4.3 Tilted Working Plane (TWP) ............................................................................. 295
4.3.1 TWP Coordinates Setting ........................................................................... 296
4.3.2 G158 Command ........................................................................................ 296
4.3.3 G158 Format ............................................................................................ 297
4.3.4 P XXXXX: Coordinates Designation ............................................................. 298
4.3.4.1 Settings of Rotary Order and Rotary Mode ........................................... 299
4.3.4.2 Coordinates Incremental/Absolute Settings........................................... 303
4.3.4.3 Set Rotary Axis to Work ...................................................................... 304
4.4 Spline Interpolation ......................................................................................... 304
4.5 Quick Guide .................................................................................................... 307
5 Macro Commands.................................................................................................. 309
5.1 Macro Type A.................................................................................................. 309
5.1.1 Variables .................................................................................................. 309
5.1.2 Basic Arithmetic Operations ....................................................................... 310
5.1.3 Built-in Functions ...................................................................................... 311
5.1.4 Conditions and Program Flow Control ......................................................... 311
5.1.5 Macro Smooth Mode ................................................................................. 313
5.1.6 Macro with Better Readability and Understandability ................................... 314
5.1.7 New Macro Functions ................................................................................ 315
5.1.8 MACRO Examples...................................................................................... 316
5.2 Macro Type B.................................................................................................. 318
5.2.1 Variables .................................................................................................. 319
5.2.2 System Variables ...................................................................................... 322
5.2.3 Arithmetic and Logic Operation .................................................................. 327
5.2.4 Macro and NC Command Blocks ................................................................. 329
5.2.5 Branch and Repetition ............................................................................... 330
5.2.6 Macro Call ................................................................................................ 333
5.2.7 Example ................................................................................................... 337
5.2.8 Added/Modified Functions ......................................................................... 338
6 FTP File Transfer ................................................................................................... 343
7 Alarms .................................................................................................................. 345
7.1 Fatal System Alarms ........................................................................................ 345
7.2 Axial Motion Alarms ......................................................................................... 346

14 / 353
7.3 Other Fatal Alarms .......................................................................................... 347
7.4 General Alarms ............................................................................................... 348
7.5 Special Exception Error .................................................................................... 353

15 / 353
16 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

1 Screen and Operational

1.1 Operational Panel

INCON-M470/M670/M675 CNC controllers' operation panel have GKYU-10 and

GKYU-8, the two available options, as shown below.

GKYU-10 Operation Panel

GKYU-8 Operation Panel

17 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

1.1.1 Operation Panel Button Introduction

There are 66 keys on the right side of GKYU-10. On the other hand, there are 10 keys
on the left side and 56 keys on the right side of GKYU-8. The key groups are shown
below:

10 function keys ：F1 to F10.

26 letter keys ：A to Z.

12 number keys ：0 to 9, plus " . " and " _ ".

4 arrow keys ：Up, down, left and right arrows (↑、↓、←、→).

7 edit keys ：INS, DEL, HOME, END, PGUP, PGDN, BS.

3 auxiliary keys ：SHIFT, CTRL, ALT.

4 other keys ：ESC, TAB, SPACE, ENTER.

1.1.2 Abbreviation Keys

Panel keys in the English initials are as follows:

INS : Insert

DEL : Delete

PGUP : Page up

PGDN : Page down

BS : Back Space

CTRL : Control

ALT : Alter

ESC : Escape

TAB : Tabulate

18 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

1.1.3 Operator Panel Auxiliary Keys

The panel has three function auxiliary keys (SHIFT, CTRL, ALT) need to be press down
together with other keys. For example: SHIFT+A means holding the SHIFT key first and
then pressing the A key. Others are the same as CTRL+F1 or ALT+F3.

1.1.4 Dialog Box Field/Item to Switch and Modify

In each parameter dialog box, there are usually multiple fields for entering or modifying
data. To enter or change options or data in the fields, the following keys are available:

ALT+letters (A to Z) ： Select this field

TAB ： Jump to the next field.

SHIFT+TAB ： Jump back to the previous field.

ENTER ： Confirm to modify parameters or save parameters. (Users

can change the settings from
"F2→Parameter→Attributes".)
ESC ： Do not save the parameters and leave the dialog box.

SPACE ： In case there are multiple options in this parameter setting

to switch the status of [ ]/[ √ ], use the option with ↑,↓
keys first, then press the SPACE button to switch the status.

Note 1: If the field in front of the option is (.) Mark, indicates field option in the same
time select only one item, to ↑, ↓ keys to move to the selection on the item,
and press the ENTER key, such as the "F2→parameter→4th Axis" is
selected.
Note 2: Please clean the panel with alcohol or scouring oil, do not use banana oil or
toluene and other solvents.

19 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

1.1.5 Shortcut Keys

1.1.5.1 Status shortcut

The status bar at the bottom of the screen is listing the corresponding shortcut keys
for operation according to the current status of the system.

Mode 1：The program is running or ready to run/DNC

F1 ： Help

F2 ： Menu

F3 ： Edit

F4 ： Manual

F5 ： Single step

F6 ： Graph mode

F7 ： MDI

F8 ： Hold

F9 ： Run

F10 ： Stop

ALT+T ： Call "Tool Table" dialogue box. (For INCON-M470/M670 from system version 5.07D or higher)

ALT+C ： Call "Coordinate Offsets" dialogue box. (For INCON-M470/M670 from system version 5.07D or
higher)

Mode 2：Manual (READY)

F1 ： Help

F2 ： Menu

F3 ： Edit

F4 ： IncStep+ (Increase the increment steps of incremental moves/hand wheel.)

F5 ： IncStep- (Decrease the increment steps of incremental moves/hand wheel.)

F9 ： Run

F10 ： Stop

ESC ： Close "MANUAL CONTROL" dialogue box.

20 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Mode 3：Manual (EDIT)

F1 ： Help

F2 ： Menu

F3 ： Edit off

F7 ： IncStep+ (Increase the increment steps of incremental moves/hand wheel.)

F8 ： IncStep- (Decrease the increment steps of incremental moves/hand wheel.)

F10 ： Stop

ALT+T ： TeachIn (Teach in program position.)

ALT+R ： ComRadius (Compute tool radius.)

ESC ： Close "MANUAL CONTROL" dialogue box.

Mode 4：MDI

F1 ： Help

F2 ： Menu

F4 ： Manual

F8 ： Hold

F9 ： Run

F10 ： Stop

ESC ： Close "MDI" dialogue box.

ALT+T ： Call "Tool Table" dialogue box. (For INCON-M470/M670 from system version 5.07D or higher)

ALT+C ： Call "Coordinate Offsets" dialogue box. (For INCON-M470/M670 from system version 5.07D or
higher)

Mode 5：Program Editing

F1 ： Help

F2 ： Menu

F3 ： Save

F4 ： Manual

F5 ： Copy

F6 ： Clear

F7 ： Paste

F8 ： Cut

ESC ： Edit off

21 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

ALT+T ： Call "Tool Table" dialogue box. (For INCON-M470/M670 from system version 5.07D or higher)

ALT+C ： Call "Coordinate Offsets" dialogue box. (For INCON-M470/M670 from system version 5.07D or
higher)

Mode 6：Command Insertion Aid

F1 ： Help

F4 ： InsBefore& (Insert command before the current block.)

F5 ： InsNxt& (Insert command after the current block.)

F6 ： NoIns& (No insertion.)

F7 ： ObjIns (Insert object pattern.)

F8 ： ObjMod (Modify object pattern.)

Mode 7：Command Modification Aid

F1 ： Help

F3 ： Mod&Nxt (Modify the current block shown in the text box and then move to the next block.)

F4 ： No&Nxt (Move to next block without modifying the current block shown in the text box.)

F5 ： Mod&Prv (Modify the current block shown in the text box and go to the previous block.)

F6 ： No& Prv (Go to the previous block without modifying the current block shown in the text box.)

Help：

ALT+F8 ： Display "System Integration Diagnosis Page"

ALT+F3 ： In the "System Integration Detection Page" switch diagnosis page

ALT+F1 ： Display the help of the instruction code list

SHIFT+F1 ： Show help explain the various topics

CTRL+F1 ： Back

1.1.5.2 Program editing shortcut keys

The quick keys that will be used when editing the program are as follows:

→ : Cursor to the right

22 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

← : Cursor left

↑ : Cursor up

↓ : Cursor down

CTRL + → : Move cursor right for one alphabetic string

CTRL + ← : Move cursor left for one alphabetic string

SHIFT+Arrow : Select a block of the program

HOME : Move cursor back to the beginning of the block

END : Move cursor to the end of the block

CTRL+PGUP : Cursor jump back to the top of the page

CTRL+PGDN : Cursor jump back to the bottom of the page

PGUP : Previous page

PGDN : Next page

BS : Remove a word forward

DEL : Delete a character

CTRL+T : Delete a string

CTRL+Y : Delete a whole line

CTRL+DEL : Delete the selected block

INS : Insert

ENTER : Change to the next line

1.2 Screen Display

The main screen of INCON-M470/M670/M675 is divided into five areas: pull-down

menu bar, program window, status bar, state window, and coordinate position window,
as shown in the following figure.

23 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

INCON-M470 Main Screen

INCON-M670 Main Screen

24 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

INCON-M675 Main Screen

1.2.1 Pull-down Menu Bar

Press F2 to access pull-down menu bar, Pull-down menu bar includes six functions:
"File", "Edit", "Run", "Manual", "Parameter", and "Help" (as shown below), select
functions by using right/left arrow key (←,→), the selected function will be highlighted
and then press ENTER to enter pull-down menu of the selected function.

Pull-down Menu Bar

1.2.2 Program Window

 The top of the Program window shows the name of the program to be executed or
edited program. "New Program" is indicated program has not named yet.
 Program window will be displayed the program to be executed or edited program
content.
 "EDIT" shown at the bottom of program window means that the program is under
editing.

25 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

 When the cursor is in "EDIT", you can "Shift+ESC" to move the cursor to the
beginning of the program.
 Cursor location: "2:1" shown at the bottom of program window means that the
cursor is at the first character of the second line, as shown below.
 If you want to edit this program, press F3 to enter edit mode; press F3 to save the
file after editing, then press ESC to finish editing.

Cursor Position (Take INCON-M470 for Example)

1.2.3 System State Window

The system state window is located at the bottom left of the state window and shows
the current execution state of the program, as shown in the following figure. If the
system is at a certain state, the corresponding item will be highlighted.

State Window (M470)

26 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

State Window (M670)

State Window (M675)

The significance of each display state is as follows:

RT ：Amount of time the program has been executed

PP ：Currently line of executing program

PROGRAM ：The file source of current program: PROGRAM or DNC

(In "Parameter → Run State" can be set)
1 ：Current authorization level (1/2/3)

TP ：Number of task

HP ：Number of HSHP table

F ：Feed rate

S ：Spindle speed

T ：Number of tool table

L ：The number of remaining loop cycles

27 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

D ：Number of tool radius compensation

H ：Number of tool length compensation

FV ：Feed rate override percentage

GV ：G00 override percentage

JV ：Jog override percentage

PC ：The number of completed workpieces

PLC ：PLC information

RUN ：The program is running

HLD ：The program hold

HMD ：Homed

INP ：Already in position

M01 ：Selective program suspended

M30 ：M30 program does not stop (program chain can be executed)
SST ：Single step block implementation

MLK ：machine lock

SLK ：Spindle axial lock
DRY ：Dry Run implementation
/SK ：Single block skip does not execute

SIM ：Simulation implementation

G01 ：G00/G01/G02/G03/G33

G21 ：G20/G21
G40 ：G40/G41/G42
G54 ：G54~G59

G50 ：G50/G51

G94 ：G94/G95

G90 ：G90/G91
G17 ：G17/G18/G19
G49 ：G49/G43

28 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G60 ：G60/G61

G15 ：G15/G16

G97 ：G96/G97

G11.4 ：G11.4/G10.4
G179 ：G178/G179

G169 ：G168/G169/G158/L_

1.2.4 Position State Window

The below of state window is the position state window and as shown. Press ALT + F3
can switch between the first, second and third position display pages. The coordinates
shown in the position state window of INCON-M470/M670/M675 are as below:

Display Page 1 Display Page 2 Display Page 3

Distance to go
(DX/DY/DZ/DC)
Program position Relative position
(PX/PY/PZ/PC) (RX/RY/RZ/RC)
M470 None
Machine position Program position
(MX/MY/MZ/MC) (PX/PY/PZ/PC)
Machine position
(MX/MY/MZ/MC)

Program position Distance to go

Program position (PX/PY/PZ/PA/PB/PC) (DX/DY/DZ/DA/DB/DC)
M670
(PX/PY/PZ/PA/PB/PC) Machine position Relative position
(MX/MY/MZ/MA/MB/MC) (RX/RY/RZ/RA/RB/RC)

Program position
(X/Y/Z/A/B/C)
Machine position
(X/Y/Z/A/B/C)
M675 None None
Relative position
(X/Y/Z/A/B/C)
Distance to go
(X/Y/Z/A/B/C)

29 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Display Page 1 Display Page 2 Display Page 3

M675
Program position Distance to go
(Version Program position (PX/PY/PZ/PA/PB/PC) (DX/DY/DZ/DA/DB/DC)
5.10E8 or (PX/PY/PZ/PA/PB/PC) Machine position Relative position

higher) (MX/MY/MZ/MA/MB/MC) (RX/RY/RZ/RA/RB/RC)

Coordinate Position Window (M470)

Coordinate Position Window (M670)

Coordinate Position Window (M675)

30 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Coordinate Position Window (M675 version 5.10E8 or higher)

 Program position ：Accumulative position from program zero. Unit: feed unit.

 Machine position ：Accumulative position from machine zero. Unit: feed unit.

 Distance to go ：The remaining distance of current block. Unit: feed unit.

 Relative position ：Total distance after "Relative Position Reset".

Note 1: The smallest digit within the system position as a feed unit (FU). The basic
unit of distance is the feed unit, its value is equal to 0.001 mm (1 μm).
Note 2: During the tool length correction, the Z value of the program position,
shows the pre-compensated coordinate. If the X and Y values of the
program position are displayed during the tool radius compensation, the
coordinate value has been compensated.

1.2.5 Diagnosis Pages

Press ALT+F3 and the right side of the controller screen will change from state window
to the system diagnosis page. The system diagnosis pages, which show the PLC I/O
state, are for the purpose of PLC debugging. Press ALT+F3 again to switch to the
second diagnosis page. Press ALT+F8 to switch back to the state window. For further
information, please refer to INCON-M470/M670/M675/M675(S) Integration Manual.

31 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

1.2.6 Manual Control Window

Depending on wiring of machine connection, the manual control by keyboard or

machine panel can be set by the machine parameter. The following is the description
of the keyboard operation. Manual operation, has four modes:

 I incremental (Inc) : Incremental step-paced precision positioning

 J jog move (Jog) : Continuous move coarse positioning

 L hand wheel (Wheel) : Handwheel movement positioning

 H homing (HOME) : homing

Press F4, the manual control window as shown in the figure below will appear. Press I,
J, L, H to select the manual control mode, or press X, Y, Z, A, B, C keys to select the axis
to be controlled. Press ESC to close manual control window.

"MANUAL CONTROL" Dialogue Box (M470)

32 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"MANUAL CONTROL" Dialogue Box (M670)

"MANUAL CONTROL" Dialogue Box (M675)

1.2.7 Graph Mode

When the program is running or ready to run, press F6 can enter graph mode. "TRACE"
window shows tool path in three display forms: 3-D (X-Y-Z), dual dimensional (X-Y and
X-Z), 2-D (2D X-Y). Press PGUP and PGDN can switch the screen between the three
forms. Press ESC to return to the main screen.

In graph mode, users can use arrow keys (←, →, ↑, ↓) to locate the graph to the left,

33 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

right, up, down of screen, and press F3/F4 to zoom in/zoom out. Press Home will move
current trace position to the center of screen.

Note: The operations in graph mode of INCON-M470, INCON-M670, and INCON-

M675 are the same, thus the figures below will take INCON-M470 for example.

1.2.7.1 3D Path Mode (3D X-Y-Z)

The (3D X-Y-Z) path mode is shown below. 3D path mode can be changed quadrant
by pressing F7 to meet the actual quadrant of the machine or follow the user's habits.

Graph Mode (3-D) (Take INCON-M470 for Example)

Different Quadrant Views in 3-D Graph Mode

34 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

1.2.7.2 Dual Dimensional (X-Y and X-Z) Plane Path Mode (X-Y & X-Z)

Press the PGDN or PGUP key to switch to Dual Plane Path Mode (X-Y & X-Z) and the
coordinate indicator will changes with G10.03. In Dual 2D mode, use the TAB key to
select (X-Y) or (X-Z) path window. Press F3 and F4 to zoom in or out of the path window,
or use the arrow keys (↑, ↓, →, ←) to pan the coordinate.

Normally, the Z-axis travel is shorter than the X and Y axis. Therefore, when the X-Z
path window is selected, the F3 key will zoom in only be magnified in multiples of 2, 5,
10, 20, 50 and 100 in the Z axis direction, and you can see Z Axis machining depth. To
press F4 key will be zoom out according to the series reduced proportion. The arrow
keys (↑, ↓, →, ←) also pan the X-Z plane.

Graph Mode (Dual Dimensional)

1.2.7.3 2D Path Mode (2D X-Y)

Press the PGDN button to switch the above dual plane path display mode to 2D path
display mode (2D X-Y). In this mode, you can see the full-screen of X-Y plane path.

35 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Graph Mode (2-D) (Take INCON-M470 for Example)

1.2.8 MDI

INCON-M470/M670/M675 from system version 5.11X or higher, in the user parameter

to add the "Extra Attribute" option, select this to open the "Extra Attribute" dialog box
(as shown below). If not checked "Multi-line MDI" option, the system will use "MDI"
(see 1.2.8.1 ); Conversely, if check the "Multi-line MDI" option, the system will use
"Multi-line MDI" (see 1.2.8.2).

"Extra Attribute" Dialog Box

1.2.8.1 MDI Dialogue Box

From the "Run" menu, select "MDI" or press F7 and there will be a "MDI" dialogue box
(as shown below). Users can type in one single block in the dialogue box and press
ENTER to execute this block immediately. Users must proceed with caution. For further
information, please refer to MDI.

36 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"MDI" Dialogue Box

1.2.8.2 Multi-Line MDI Edit Window

INCON-M470/M670 from system version 5.12A or higher, INCON-M675 from system

version 5.10K or higher, in "Extra Attribute" in the new "Multi-line MDI" option, Which
is described below: (Detailed usage, please refer to Extra Attribute)

 Press the F7 key to pop up the "Multi-line MDI" edit window, which is used to enter
the MDI command to be executed.
 Press the ESC key to close this edit window. The entered commands will be saved for
later use when the edit window is closed.
 You can use Ctrl+Del to delete all the data in the MDI window and confirm dialog
box pop-up.

Delete MDI All Data's "Confirm" Dialog Box

 Press CS (F9) to start execution of the line instruction of the cursor to the last line.

For example: as shown in the following figure, the MDI editing window.
1. If CS is pressed while the cursor is in the first line, the system will move to the X-axis

37 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

50 mm position, the Y-axis 100 mm position, and the Z-axis 10 mm position.

2. If CS is pressed while the cursor is in the second line, the system will move to the 100
mm position on the Y axis and the 10 mm position on the Z axis.

"Multi-line MDI" Edit Window (Take INCON-M670 for Example)

 If F7 is pressed while the cursor is in the first line, the MDI dialog box is popped up
for the user to execute a single line command, and the "MDI in progress" message
dialog box is displayed during execution.

"MDI" Dialog Box

38 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

1.3 Environment and Maintenance Precautions

1.3.1 Working Environment

Allowable Temperature 0°C ~45°C

Temperature No freezing.
Storing Temperature -15°C ~65°C

Allowable Humidity Under 90% RH

Humidity No dewing.
Storing Humidity Under 90% RH
Ambient
Placed indoors, avoid direct sunlight.
Conditions Mist and
Stay away from oil mist and dust.
Vapor
Avoid corrosive and incendive gases.

Elevation Under 1000m elevation

2
Vibration Under 5 m/s

1.3.2 Maintenance Precautions

1. In order to keep the voltage stable, a voltage stabilizer should be installed.

2. In order to avoid electrical discharges, the working temperature must be under

40°C.

3. Clean the strainer of the controller box regularly.

4. Clean the panel with alcohol or cleaning naphtha, do not use solvent.

5. Prevent dust, corrosive air, liquid, and inflammable substances from entering

the controller box.

6. In order to prevent damage of the controller, when the system needs to be

restarted, wait at least 20 seconds.

39 / 353
INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

40 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2 Pull-down Menus

The CNC controller menu contains 6 function menus. Press the F2 key to enter the
menu selection. Press ,  to select and press the ENTER key to access the function
menu of this function or press the English alphabet keys (F, E, R, M, P, H) corresponding
to the menu can also be used to jump to the desired menu. (please refer to 1.2.1 Pull-
down Menu Bar)

2.1 File Management (F2→F)

This pull-down menu serves as a CNC program related operation.

"F2→File" Pull-down Menu

2.1.1 New

Press "F2→File→New" to open a blank file for users to edit CNC program. After editing,
you can save the new program by "F2→File→Save" or "F2→File→Save As".

2.1.2 Open

When "Open" is selected, a file dialog box will appear to show the program extend
named ".CNC" in the CNC controller (as shown below). Use arrow keys (↑, ↓, ←, →) to
select the desired file or Enter the file name directly, press the ENTER key to open the
file.

41 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

If the file is not stored in the memory of the CNC controller, press F3 to switch to USB.
To obtain the file in the same way, press the quick key F3 again to switch back to the
controller's memory (for details, please refer to USB Function).

Note 1: Only the file name of the program is displayed on the list, and the extend
file name is not displayed.
Note 2: A CNC program file can have a maximum of 8 characters, consisting of 26
English letters (A~Z) and 10 Arabic numerals (0~9). When the program is
saved, CNC program will add ".CNC" as the extension, for example:
"SAMPLE.CNC".

"Open a File" Dialogue Box

2.1.2.1 Long File Name

From system version 5.07D or higher, INCON-M470/M670 supports long file name
display, it can show file names with 30 digits at most in "Open a File" dialogue box. If
the file names are longer than 30 digits, it will show with ~ (tilt symbol).

Note 1: When using subprogram call function, the called subprogram file name
cannot be longer than 8 digits.
Note 2: This feature is only INCON-M470/M670 available.

42 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.1.2.2 File Previewing

From system version 5.07D or higher, INCON-M470/M670 supports file previewing

function. From "F2→File", select "Open" to open "Open a File" dialogue box. The
bottom of the dialogue box will show the first three lines of the selected program file,
date, file size, and the remaining space of controller.

Note: This feature is only INCON-M470/M670 available.

"Open a File" Dialogue Box (With Long File Name and File Previewing Functions)

2.1.3 Save

From the "File" menu, select "Save", users can save the current program to the storage
space of controller or USB flash drive.

2.1.4 Save As

From the "File" menu, select "Save As", there will be a "Save File As" dialogue box,
users can save the current program to the storage space of controller or USB flash drive
with a new file name (as shown below).

43 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"Save File As" Dialogue Box

2.1.5 Delete File

To delete an existing CNC program, press "F2→File→Delete File", the file delete dialog
box will appear. Use the arrow keys to select the file you want to delete, press the
ENTER key to delete the file.

"Delete a File" Dialogue Box

Note: INCON-M470/M670 from system version 5.12A or higher, INCON-M675 from

system version 5.10K or higher, a list of files in the dialogue box will show
extend file name, to facilitate users delete DNC files.

44 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.1.6 Import File From USB

INCON-M470/M670/M675 from system version 5.12D or higher, the controller can be

executed from the USB disc copying program to the internal storage space. Place the
program to be copied in the root directory of the USB disk and broadcast it to the USB
port of the controller, press "F2→File→Import File From USB", this will pop up the
dialog box to display the CNC program in the root directory of the USB disk (as shown
in the figure), after selecting the file to copy to the controller, press OK to complete the
file copy action.

"Import File From USB" Dialogue Box

2.1.7 System Shutdown

Select this option to shut down the entire system automatically according to the
procedure.

Note: Be sure to execute the shutdown procedure with "System Shutdown" so that
the system can save the state or parameters to be used at the next power-on
during the shutdown process.

45 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.2 Program Editing (F2→E)

Press "F2→Edit", go to the "Edit" pull-down menu, which provides common features
in common windowing environments: "Cut", "Copy", "Clear", "Paste", "Find",
"Replace" and "Go to Line". In addition, there are instructional editing functions such
as "Command Insertion Aid", "Command Modification Aid", "Teach In" and
"Compute Radius" to assist programmers who are less familiar with CNC commands.

"F2→Edit" Pull-down Menu

Note 1: Program editing keys functions please refer to 1.1.5.2 。

Note 2: "Replace" available for M675 only.

2.2.1 Clipboard

The CNC controller got a built in Clipboard, for the temporary storage of program that
are copied or cut out. This Clipboard is blank when powered on. When a block program
is cut or copied, it is temporarily saved in the Clipboard until another block program is
cut or copied, replacing the original block program.

2.2.1.1 Clipboard Function

To select blocks, place the cursor at the beginning of the first block, press SHIFT and
hold, and then use right arrow key (→) to mark blocks to be selected (as shown below).
To cut selected blocks, from the "Edit" menu, select "Cut" or press F8. To copy selected

46 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

blocks, from the "Edit" menu, select "Copy" or press F5. To paste selected blocks, move
the cursor to where the blocks to be pasted, and from the "Edit" menu, select "Paste"
or press F7. Unmark the selected blocks by pressing F6.

Selected Blocks

2.2.1.2 Clipboard Shortcut Keys

When in edit mode program, except that "F2→Edit" drop-down menu of functions,
May also be used in the status shortcuts editing programs, please refer to 1.1.5.

2.2.3 Replace

Press "F2→Edit→Replace" will pop up the dialog box (as shown below), then enter the
"Text to find" and "New text", press the ENTER key will start looking for "Text to find".

"Replace" Dialog Box

47 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

When the string is found, it is displayed in highlight, and pop up "Information" dialog
box, ask if you have replaced with a "New text", Y Replace, N No, as shown below.

"Information" Dialog Box

Note: "Replace" command is only available in "EDIT" mode.

2.2.2 Find

Press "F2→Edit→Find" will pop up the dialog box, then enter the string you want to
find, press the ENTER key will start to find, and will find the string to highlight. If you
press ENTER again, you can skip to the next search result and press ESC to exit the
"Find" dialog box.

"Find" Dialog Box

NOTE: The function of pressing ENTER to move to the next search result and
pressing ESC to close the dialogue box is available only for INCON-
M470/M670 from system version 5.11B or higher.

2.2.4 Go to Line

Press "F2→Edit→Go to Line", you can perform the function of jumping to the specified

48 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

number of lines immediately. When this function is selected, a "Go to Line" dialog box
appears, where you can enter the number of lines to jump to and press ENTER, the
cursor will move to the specified line, or enter +nnn or -nnn (line) and press ENTER,
the cursor will move to the current number of rows down or up a few lines.

"Goto/Jump" Dialog Box

2.2.5 Command Insertion Aid

Press the "F2→Edit→Command Insertion Aid", there will be a pop-up pull-down menu
listing command items that helps users edit program.

"Command Insertion Aid" Pop-up Menu

Note 1: Each relevant dialog box pop up when each item of command is selected
items or data fields in the dialog boxes with "*" are optional. If items or data
fields are labeled with "#", it represents can make different combinations.
Note 2: After entering values in data field and press ENTER, there will be a
corresponding block added in program window automatically. Examples
are given in later sections: Positioning, Linear Interpolation, Circular
Interpolation, Cancycle.

49 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Note 3: The coordinate of axis are different according to the working plane setting
(G17/G18/G19). For example, in mode G19, the 1st axis is Y and the 2nd axis
is Z.
Mode 1st Axis 2nd Axis

G17 X Y
G18 Z X
G19 Y Z

2.2.5.1 Path Related Commands (Positioning, Linear Interpolation,

Circular Interpolation)

2.2.5.1.1 Positioning (G00)

Format: G00 X_Y_Z_C_ (M470)

Format: G00 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_ (M670/M675)

From the "Command Insertion Aid" menu, select "Positioning", there will be a dialog
box (as shown in the figure).

"G00 Positioning (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box (M470)

50 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"G00 Positioning (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box (M670/M675)

G00 Positioning Command Block

2.2.5.1.2 Linear Interpolation (G01)

Format: G01 X_Y_Z_C_(R_/L_)F_ (M470)

Format: G01 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_(R_/L_)F_ (M670/M675)

From the "Command Insertion Aid" menu, select "Linear Interpolation", there will be
a dialog box (as shown in the figure).

51 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"G01 Line (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box (M470)

"G01 Line (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box (M670/M675)

Key in values in each of the data field and press ENTER, there will be a corresponding
block added in program window (as shown in the figure).

G01 Linear Interpolation Command Block

 X/Y/Z/A/B/C End Position: can be shown in absolute positions or incremental values,

which depend on G90 or G91 mode.
 Corner Rounding (R value) and Chamfering (L value) commands are available only
when the command block is inserted between two linear interpolation command

52 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

blocks.

Corner rounding and chamfering

 Feed Rate (F value): the velocity at which the cutter is fed, the system will adopt the
value set last time if users do not make any changes.

2.2.5.1.3 Circular Interpolation (G02/G03)

Format:
G02/G03 X_Y_(Z_)R_F_ ; Radius format
G02/G03 X_Y_(Z_)I_J_(I_K_/J_K_)F_ ; Center format
G02/G03 I_J_(I_K_/J_K_)A_F_ ; Angle format

From the "Command Insertion Aid" menu, select "Circular Interpolation", there will
be a dialog box (as shown in the figure).

"G02/G03 Arc (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box

Key in values in each of the data field and press ENTER, there will be a corresponding
block added in program window (as shown in the figure). This dialog box can be
inserted into the G02/G03 positive or negative circular interpolation command, the end

53 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

of the circle or arc can be represented by absolute coordinates/incremental values or

right angle/polar coordinates.

G02/G03 Circular Interpolation Block (Center Format)

 Orientation (G): The cutting orientation can be clockwise (CW, G02) or

counterclockwise (CCW , G03).
 X/Y/Z End Position: The end position of circular interpolation. It can be shown in
absolute positions or incremental values.
 Text boxes labeled with "#" can make up three different formats of arc commands,
the examples (with G17 X-Y plane) are given below:
i. Radius format: Key in values in data fields of X End Position, Y End Position, and
Arc Radius. If R value is negative, the arc angle will be grater than 180º.
ii. Center format: Key in values in data fields of X End Position, Y End Position, X
Axis Center, and Y Axis Center. X Axis Center and Y Axis Center are relative
distances between the center position of circle and start position.
iii. Angle format: Key in values in data fields of X Axis Center, Y Axis Center, and Arc
Angle.
 Feed Rate (F value): the velocity at which the cutter is fed, the system will adopt the
value set last time if users do not make any changes.

Note: For further information about G02/G03 command, please refer to

Programming Codes.

54 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.2.5.2 Cancycle

Format: G73/G76/G83/G87 X_Y_Z_（R_Q_K_F_）

Format: G74/G81/G84/G85/G86/G88/G89 X_Y_Z_（R_K_F_）
Format: G82 X_Y_Z_（R_P_K_F_）

From the "Command Insertion Aid" menu, select "Cancycle", there will be a dialog box
(as shown in the figure below).

"G73/G74/G76/G81-G89 Cancycle (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box

Key in value in each data field and press ENTER, there will be a corresponding block
added in program window (as shown in the figure). The items in this dialog box are the
same as those defined in the cancycle instructions such as drilling, boring or tapping,
the user can input the required data according to different cycle instructions.

G73/G74/G76/G81-G89 Cancycle Block

55 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

 G90/G91 (absolute positions/incremental values) and G98/G99 (start position

return/reference position return) also has functionality in this dialog box.
 Drill Pos/Depth X/Y/Z: can be shown in absolute positions or incremental values,
which depend on G90 or G91 mode.
 Refrence Pos (R value): reference position for machining.
 Step In Depth (Q value): the depth being machined per layer. U_/V_/W_ will
automatically determine whether it is U_, V_ or W_ depending on the selected plane
mode (G17/G18/G19).
 Dwell Time (P value): spindle dwell time after reaching the bottom of drilled hole.
 Count (K value): the value of repetitive drilling times. If the K value is filled in with an
absolute coordinate value, the system will only perform 1 drilling regardless of the
value of K filled in. If the K value is filled in relative increments, the system repeats K
drilling cycles. (as shown in the figure below)
 Feed Rate (F value): the velocity at which the cutter is fed, the system will adopt the
value set last time if users do not make any changes.
 Values of Drill Pos/Depth X and Drill Pos/Depth Y adopting incremental values (G91
mode) will have the same function as "Line Drill Pattern" in "Drill Pattern".

Repetitive Drilling (Incremental Value)

2.2.5.3 Drill Pattern

"Drill Pattern" includes "Line Drill Pattern", "Grid Drill Pattern", and "Arc Drill Pattern".
"Drill Pattern" can also be applied in "Cancycle" commands (G73~G89), so the drilling
or tapping can also work. Dialog boxes of "Drill Pattern" contain 1st Axis Delta and 2nd
Axis Delta data fields, the axial coordinate of the comparison in each plane mode is
shown in the following table, for example, in G17 (X-Y plane), 1st axis represents X-axis
and 2nd axis represents Y-axis.

56 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Mode 1st axis 2nd axis

G17 X Y
G18 Z X
G19 Y Z

2.2.5.3.1 Line Drill Pattern

Format: G70.07 G_X_Y_Z_R_I_J_L_Q_P_F

"Line Drill Pattern" command makes drilling holes aligned.

"G70.7 Line Drill Pattern (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box

Line Drill Pattern

 Cancycle Code (G value): Users type in the optional data field based on the selected
Cancycle Code (G73~G89).
 Start Pos/Depth (X/Y/Z): start position and depth. G90/G91 (absolute
positions/incremental values) and G98/G99 (start position return/reference position

57 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

return) commands can be adopted.

 Refrence Pos (R value): reference position for machining.
 1st Axis Delta (I value): distance between two holes on 1st axis.
 2nd Axis Delta (J value): distance between two holes on 2nd axis.
 Count (L value): number of holes, it should be positive.
 Step In Depth (Q value): the depth being machined per layer. U_/V_/W_ will
automatically determine whether it is U_, V_ or W_ depending on the selected plane
mode (G17/G18/G19).
 Dwell Time (P value): spindle dwell time after reaching the bottom of drilled hole.
 Feed Rate (F value): the velocity at which the cutter is fed, the system will adopt the
value set last time if users do not make any changes.
 When "Line Drill Pattern" command is finished, the tool will retract perpendicular to
start position of the last hole.

Note: Start height refers to the depth of the 3rd-axis on the selected plane
(G17/G18/G19).

2.2.5.3.2 Grid Drill Pattern

Format: G70.08 C_G_X_Y_Z_R_I_J_A_B_U_V_W_D_Q_P_F_

"Grid Drill Pattern" command makes the drilling holes be gridded.

"G70.08 Grid Drill Pattern (Metric Mode)" Dialog Box

58 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Grid Drill Pattern

 Axis Orientation (C value): options of the axial machining order, the command in
program will be C0/C1. The axial machining order of C0 command is from X-axis to
Y-axis. The axial machining order of C1 command is from Y-axis to X-axis.
 Cancycle Code (G value): Users type in the G code based on the selected Cancycle
Code (G73~G89).
 Start Pos/Depth (X/Y/Z): start position and depth. G90/G91 (absolute
positions/incremental values).
 Refrence Pos (R value): reference position for machining.
 1st Axis Delta (I value): distance between two holes on 1st axis.
 2nd Axis Delta (J value): distance between two holes on 2nd axis.
 1st Axis Count: In the drill count in the 1st axis direction, this value cannot be a
negative number.
 2nd Axis Count: In the drill count in the 2nd axis direction, this value cannot be a
negative number.
 Text boxes labeled with "#" can make up three different formats of "Grid Drill
Pattern" command:
i. Key in values in data field of 1st Axis Delta, 2nd Axis Delta, 1st Axis Count, and 2nd
Axis Count.
ii. Key in values in data field of End Position X/Y/Z, 1st Axis Count, and 2nd Axis Count.
iii. Key in values in data field of End Position X/Y/Z, 1st Axis Delta, 2nd Axis Delta.
 If each axis end position (U, V or W) , each axis delta (I, J), each axis orientation hole
count (A, B) is input, the end position (U, V or W) of each axis will be ignored.
 Tilt Angle (D value): the tilt angle of holes arrangement from Start Pos (X/Y/Z), which
is optional. This option has "*", which means it can be worked or not, so you don't
key in data, if no title angle.
 Step In Depth (Q value): the depth being machined per layer. U_/V_/W_ will

59 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

automatically determine whether it is U_, V_ or W_ depending on the selected plane

mode (G17/G18/G19).
 Dwell Time (P value): spindle dwell time after reaching the bottom of drilled hole.
 Feed Rate (F value): the velocity at which the cutter is fed, the system will adopt the
value set last time if users do not make any changes.
 When "Grid Drill Pattern" command is finished, the tool will retract perpendicular
to start height of the last hole.

Tilt Angle of "Grid Drill Pattern"

2.2.5.3.3 Arc Drill Pattern

Format: G70.09 G_X_Y_Z_R_C_A_I_L_B_Q_P_F_

"Arc Drill Pattern" command makes the drilling holes arced or circular.

"G70.09 Arc Drill Pattern (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box

60 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Arc Drill Pattern

 Cancycle Code (G value): Users type in the optional data field based on the selected
Cancycle Code (G73~G89).
 Center Pos/Depth (X/Y/Z): center position and depth. It can be absolute positions
or incremental values, which depend on G90 or G91 mode (absolute
positions/incremental values).
 Refrence Pos (R value): reference position for machining.
 Absolute or incremental coordinates can be used for the center of the circle.
 Text boxes labeled with "#" can make up three different formats of "Arc Drill
Pattern" command:
i. Key in values in data field of Delta Angle and Count.
ii. Key in values in data field of End Angle and Count.
iii. Key in values in data field of End Angle and Delta Angle.
 Pattern Radius (C value): the radius of "Arc Drill Pattern", it must be positive.
 Start Angle (A value): the start angle of "Arc Drill Pattern".
 Delta Angle (I value): the angle between two drilled holes.
 Count (L value): number of holes.
 End Angle (B value) must be greater than Start Angle (A value). For example, the End
Angle must be 390° (360°+30°) instead of 30°.
 If users enter all values in data field of Delta Angle, Count, and End Angle, the value
of End Angle will be ignored.
 Step In Depth (Q value): the depth being machined per layer.
 Dwell Time (P value): spindle dwell time after reaching the bottom of drilled hole.
 Feed Rate (F value): the velocity at which the cutter is fed, the system will adopt the
value set last time if users do not make any changes.

61 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

 When "Arc Drill Pattern" command is finished, the tool will retract perpendicular to
start height of the last hole.

Start Angle and End Angle

2.2.5.4 Object Pattern

"Object Pattern" includes "Line Object Pattern", "Grid Object Pattern", "Arc Object
Pattern". Object pattern command has to work with other machining commands.
Select one of the object patterns and press ENTER, there will be a corresponding dialog
box. Key in the value in each data field and then press F7, there will be a pop up menu
showing machining commands which work with object pattern commands; Select one
of the machining commands and press ENTER, there will be a dialog box. Users need
to key in value in each data field and press ENTER, then the screen will show dialog box
of the selected object pattern again. Press ENTER and there will be a corresponding
block added in program window.

2.2.5.4.1 Line Object Pattern

Format: G70.21 I_J_L_

@ G70.11(G41/G42)P_X_Y_Z_(U_V_W_)C_J_K_Q_R_I_E_F_
(Contour Pocket Side Surfacing Machining is taken for example here)

""G70.21 Line Object Pattern (Metric Mode)" Dialog Box

62 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Line Object Pattern

 1st Axis Delta (I value): distance between two objects on 1st Axis.
 2nd Axis Delta (J value): distance between two objects on 2nd Axis.
 The orientation of 1st axis and 2nd axis are depends on the working plane
(G17/G18/G19).
 Count (L value): number of holes, it should be positive.
 The start position (X,Y) of the first object is defined in the selected machining
command following @.
 When "Line Object Pattern" command is finished, the tool will retract perpendicular
to start height of the last object.

2.2.5.4.2 Grid Object Pattern

Format: G70.22 C_I_ J_A_B_(D_)

@ G70.11(G41/G42)P_X_Y_Z_(U_V_W_)C_J_K_Q_R_I_E_F_
(Contour Pocket Side Surfacing Machining is taken for example here)

"G70.22 Grid Object Pattern (Metric Mode)" Dialog Box

63 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Grid Object Pattern

 Axis Orientation (C value): options of the axial machining order, the command in
program will be C0/C1. The axial machining order of C0 command is from X-axis to
Y-axis. The axial machining order of C1 command is from Y-axis to X-axis.
 1st Axis Delta (I value): distance between two objects on 1st Axis.
 2nd Axis Delta (J value): distance between two objects on 2nd Axis.
 1st Axis Count (A value): number of objects being machined on 1st axis, it should be
positive.
 2nd Axis Count (B value): number of objects being machined on 2nd axis, it should
be positive.
 The orientation of 1st axis and 2nd axis are depends on the working plane
(G17/G18/G19).
 The start position (X,Y) of the first object is defined in the selected machining
command following @.
 When "Grid Object Pattern" command is finished, the tool will retract perpendicular
to the start height of last object.
 Tilt Angle (D value): the tilt angle of object arrangement from the start position (X,Y),
which is optional. This option has "*", which means it can be worked or not, so you
don't key in data, if no title angle.

Tilt Angle of Grid Object Pattern

64 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.2.5.4.3 Arc Object Pattern

Format: G70.23 (X_Y_/R_A_)I_L_

@ G70.11(G41/G42)P_X_Y_Z_(U_V_W_)C_J_K_Q_R_I_E_F_
(Contour Pocket Side Surfacing Machining is taken for example here)

"G70.23 Arc Object Pattern (Metric Mode)" Dialog Box

Arc Object Pattern

 Center X/Y/Z: the center position of "Arc Object Pattern", which is defined by the
plane of 1st axis and 2nd axis (The orientation of 1st axis and 2nd axis are depends on
the working plane G17/G18/G19).
 Pattern Radius (R value): the radius of "Arc Object Pattern", it must be positive.
 Pattern Center An (A value): the start angle of "Arc Object Pattern",this is the angle
from the first axis to the starting point of the starting object to the center of the "Arc
Object Pattern".
 Delta Angle (I value): angle between two objects.
 Count (L value): number of holes, it should be positive.
 The start position (X,Y) of the first object is defined in the selected machining
command following @.

65 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

 When "Arc Object Pattern" command is finished, the tool will retract perpendicular
to start height of the last object.

2.2.5.5 Pocket/Dowel/Side Surfacing Machining Commands

All of the pocket/dowel/side surfacing machining commands can function with the
combination of rotating or scaling commands. There are several common items in
pocket/dowel/side surfacing machining commands which will be introduced below.

1. Radius (R)

Users can enter a radius value (R value) in the relevant data field of
pocket/dowel/side surfacing machining commands and the corners of rectangular
tool path will be rounded.

Rounded Corner

2. Chamfering (L)

Users can enter a value (L value) in the relevant data field of pocket/dowel/side
surfacing machining commands and the corners of rectangular tool path will be
chamfered.

Chamfered Corner

66 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3. Tilt Angle (D)

Users can type in a tilt angle value (D value) in the relevant data field of
pocket/dowel/side surfacing machining commands and the rectangular tool path
will be tilted with the angle D.

Tilt Angle

2.2.5.6 Pocket Machining

1. Pocket machining includes "Rectangular Pocket" (G70.00) and "Circular Pocket"

(G70.01), before using these two instructions, please note the following:
(1) Orientation (G): The cutting orientation can be clockwise (CW, G02) or
counterclockwise (CCW , G03).
(2) Step In Axis (P): can be Not Defined, + 1st Axis, + 2nd Axis, - 1st Axis, and - 2nd
Axis, which will be shown as P0~P4 command in the program. The orientation of
1st axis and 2nd axis are depends on the working plane (G17/G18/G19).
(3) The radius of tool should be defined before pocket machining. It can be defined
by tool table (D_).
(4) G70.00 and G70.01 are both one-shot commands; users need to type G70.xx
command in each pocket machining block. If continuous pocket machining
command is written in the program instead of using "Command Insertion Aid",
users still need to type G70.xx command in each of the blocks and values of new
Center (X/Y/Z). Under the circumstances, if users do not change any of the other
values, the system will adopt the previous settings.

67 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

(5) The d value in the figures of pocket machining commands is the same as the
value set in "F2→Parameter→Cancycle Parameters→Cut In Retract Length".
(6) If values of Fine Feed Width (J value) and Fine Feed Depth (K value) were left
blank, the system will not process fine cutting.
(7) If G70.00 in values of Chamfering (L value)/Corner Rounding (R value) were left
blank, the system will not process chamfered/rounded angle machining.
(8) If value of Fine Feed Rate (E value) was left blank, the system will replace the value
with half of Feed Rate (F value) value.
(9) Pocket machining starts from the center of object and gradually widens the
pocket layer by layer.

2. Pocket machining starts from center of the object and gradually widens the dowel
layer by layer. There are four percentage options of the widening width (150%,
125%, 100%, 75%). Users can select from "F2→Parameter→Cancycle
Parameters→StepInWidth".

3. The sequence of pocket machining is below:

(1) The tool move rapidly to center position Center X/Y (X,Y) and start height, which
is Center Z (Z value) + Clearance (C value) of the pocket.
(2) The tool descends to Step In Depth (Q value) with Spindle Feed Rate (I value).
(3) The tool processes pocket machining with chosen Orientation and Feed Rate (F
value).
(4) The tool move back to center position and start height after finishing one layer.
(5) The tool descends again to Step In Depth (Q value) with Spindle Feed Rate (I
value) and processes pocket machining of the next layer.
(6) The tool repeats the above steps until it reaches Length/Depth Z (W value).
(7) Lastly, the tool processes cutting with Fine Feed Rate (E value).
(8) When pocket machining command is finished, the tool retracts perpendicular to
start height and stay at center position of the pocket.

68 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.2.5.6.1 Rectangular Pocket Machining

Format: G70.00(G02/G03)P_X_Y_Z_U_V_W_C_J_K_Q_(R_/L_)D_I_E_F_

"G70.00 Rectangular Pocket (Metric Mode)" Dialog Box

 Orientation (G): The cutting orientation can be clockwise (CW, G02) or

counterclockwise (CCW , G03).
 Step In Axis (P): can be Not Defined, + 1st Axis, + 2nd Axis, - 1st Axis, and - 2nd Axis,
which will be shown as P0~P4 command in the program. The orientation of 1st axis
and 2nd axis are depends on the working plane (G17/G18/G19).
 Center X/Y/Z: center of pocket machining. It can be absolute positions or
incremental values.
 Length/Depth of X/Y/Z axis: In G17 mode (X-Y plane), Length/Depth X and Y (U and
V value) define length and width of the rectangular pocket. Length/Depth Z (W
value) defines depth of the pocket and the value is negative.
 Clearance (C value): the safe starting height for machining.
 Fine Feed Width (J value) and Fine Feed Depth (K value): the width and depth of fine
cut.
 Step In Depth (Q value): the depth being machined per layer.
 If users enter values in both text boxes of Corner Rounding (R value) and
Chamfering (L value), the later one will be ignored.
 Tilt Angle (D value): the angle which rectangular tool path tilted with.
 Spindle Feed Rate (I value): feed rate of spindle. Please refer to INCON-
M84/M86/M86R Integration Manual for more information.
 Fine Feed Rate (E value): feed rate of fine cutting. If the value of Fine Feed Rate (E

69 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

value) was left blank, system will replace the value with half of Feed Rate (F value)
value.
 Feed Rate (F value): the velocity at which the cutter is fed, the system will adopt the
value set last time if users do not make any changes.

Examples of pocket machining in three formats are given below:

 Rectangular pocket machining with rounded corner:

Rectangular Pocket Machining with Rounded Corner

 Rectangular pocket machining with chamfered corner:

Rectangular Pocket Machining with Chamfered Corner

 Rectangular pocket machining with tilt angle:

70 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Rectangular Pocket Machining with Tilt Angle

2.2.5.6.2 Circular Pocket Machining

Format: G70.01(G02/G03)(P_)X_Y_Z_R_U_(C_ J_ K_)Q_I_(E_ F_)

"G70.01 Circular Pocket (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box

 Orientation (G): The cutting orientation can be clockwise (CW, G02) or

counterclockwise (CCW , G03).
 Step In Axis (P): can be Not Defined, + 1st Axis, + 2nd Axis, - 1st Axis, and - 2nd Axis,
which will be shown as P0~P4 command in the program. The orientation of 1st axis
and 2nd axis are depends on the working plane (G17/G18/G19).
 Center X/Y/Z: center of pocket machining. It can be absolute positions or
incremental values.
 Pocket Radius (R value): the radius of circular pocket being machined.
 U/V/W Depth (U value): the depth of the pocket. The value is negative.
 Clearance (C value): the safe starting height for machining.
 Fine Feed Width (J value) and Fine Feed Depth (K value): the width and depth of fine
cut.
 Step In Depth (Q value): the depth being machined per layer.

71 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

 Spindle Feed Rate (I value): feed rate of spindle. Please refer to INCON-
M84/M86/M86R Integration Manual for more information.
 Fine Feed Rate (E value): feed rate of fine cutting. If the value of Fine Feed Rate (E
value) was left blank, system will replace the value with half of Feed Rate (F value)
value.
 Feed Rate (F value): the velocity at which the cutter is fed, the system will adopt the
value set last time if users do not make any changes.
 Users need to set the number of tool table (D_) and the tool radius before
processing pocket machining.

Circular Pocket Machining

2.2.5.7 Dowel Machining

Dowel machining includes "Rectangular Dowel" and "Circular Dowel". The sequence
of dowel machining is below:
(1) The tool move rapidly to start position (Xs, Ys) and start height, which is Center Z
(Z value) + Clearance (C value).
(2) The tool descends to Step In Depth (Q value) with Spindle Feed Rate (I value).
(3) The tool processes dowel machining with chosen Orientation and Feed Rate (F
value).
(4) The tool move back to center position and start height after finishing one layer.
(5) The tool descends again to Step In Depth (Q value) with Spindle Feed Rate (I

72 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

value) and processes dowel machining of the next layer.

(6) The tool repeats the above steps until it reaches Length/Depth Z (W value).
(7) Lastly, the tool processes cutting with Fine Feed Rate (E value).
(8) When dowel machining command is finished, the tool ascends to start height
and stay at center position Center X/Y (X,Y) of the dowel.
(9) Dowel machining starts from center of the object and gradually widens the dowel
layer by layer. There are four percentage options of the widening width (150%,
125%, 100%, 75%). Users can select from "F2→Parameter→Cancycle
Parameters→StepInWidth".

2.2.5.7.1 Rectangular Dowel Machining

Format: G70.02(G02/G03)(P_)X_Y_Z_U_V_W_A_B_(C_ J_K_)Q_(L_/R_ D_)

I_(E_F_)

"G70.02 Rectangular Dowel (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box

 Orientation (G): The cutting orientation can be clockwise (CW, G02) or

counterclockwise (CCW , G03).
 Step In Axis (P): can be Not Defined, + 1st Axis, + 2nd Axis, - 1st Axis, and - 2nd Axis,
which will be shown as P0~P4 command in the program. The orientation of 1st axis
and 2nd axis are depends on the working plane (G17/G18/G19).
 Center X/Y/Z: center of dowel machining. It can be absolute positions or incremental
values.

73 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

 Length/Depth of X/Y/Z axis: In G17 mode (X-Y plane), Length/Depth X and Y (U and
V value) define length and width of the rectangular dowel. Length/Depth Z (W value)
defines depth of the dowel and the value is negative.
 Axis1/Axis2 Peri Length (A and B value): define outer length and width of the
rectangular dowel. Value A and B must be greater than value U and V.
 Clearance (C value): the safe starting height for machining.
 Fine Feed Width (J value) and Fine Feed Depth (K value): the width and depth of fine
cut.
 Step In Depth (Q value): the depth being machined per layer.
 If users enter values in both text boxes of Corner Rounding (R value) and
Chamfering (L value), the later one will be ignored.
 Tilt Angle (D value): the angle which rectangular tool path tilted with.
 Spindle Feed Rate (I value): feed rate of spindle. Please refer to INCON-
M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) Integration Manual for more information.
 Fine Feed Rate (E value): feed rate of fine cutting. If the value of Fine Feed Rate (E
value) was left blank, system will replace the value with half of Feed Rate (F value)
value.
 Feed Rate (F value): the velocity at which the cutter is fed, the system will adopt the
value set last time if users do not make any changes.
 Users need to set the number of tool table (D_) and the tool radius before
processing dowel machining.

Rectangular Dowel Machining

74 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.2.5.7.2 Circular Dowel Machining

Format: G70.03(G02/G03)(P_)X_Y_Z_R_U_ A_(C_J_K_)Q_ I_(E_F_)

"G70.03 Circular Dowel (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box

 Orientation (G): The cutting orientation can be clockwise (CW, G02) or

counterclockwise (CCW , G03).
 Step In Axis (P): can be Not Defined, + 1st Axis, + 2nd Axis, - 1st Axis, and - 2nd Axis,
which will be shown as P0~P4 command in the program. The orientation of 1st axis
and 2nd axis are depends on the working plane (G17/G18/G19).
 Center X/Y/Z: center of dowel machining. It can be absolute positions or incremental
values.
 Dowel Radius (R value): the radius of inner circle.
 U/V/W Depth (U value): the depth of the dowel. The value is negative.
 Perimeter Radius (A value): the radius of perimeter circle.
 Perimeter Radius (A value) must be greater than Dowel Radius (R value).
 Clearance (C value): the safe starting height for machining.
 Fine Feed Width (J value) and Fine Feed Depth (K value): the width and depth of fine
cut.
 Step In Depth (Q value): the depth being machined per layer.
 Spindle Feed Rate (I value): feed rate of spindle. Please refer to INCON-
M84/M86/M86R Integration Manual for more information.
 Fine Feed Rate (E value): feed rate of fine cutting. If the value of Fine Feed Rate (E
value) was left blank, system will replace the value with half of Feed Rate (F value)
value.

75 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

 Feed Rate (F value): the velocity at which the cutter is fed, the system will adopt the
value set last time if users do not make any changes.
 Users need to set the number of tool table (D_) and the tool radius before
processing dowel machining.

Circular Dowel Machining

2.2.5.8 Side Surfacing Machining

Side surfacing machining includes outside-in rectangular/circular side surfacing and

inside-out rectangular/circular side surfacing. The sequence of side surfacing
machining is below:

(1) The tool move rapidly to the start position Center X/Y (X,Y) and the start height,
which is Center Z (Z value) + Clearance (C value).
(2) The tool descends to Length/Depth Z (W value) with Feed Rate (F value), then,
side surfacing machining is started according to the selected cutting direction
and the input feed rate.
(3) When side surfacing machining command is finished, the tool ascends to the
start height and stay at the center position Center X/Y (X,Y).

Note: When starting side surfacing machining, the tool will first cut into the side
surfacing machining surface in a semi-circular path. When the side surfacing

76 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

machining is completed, the tool will also leave the side surfacing machining
surface in a semicircular path (Please refer to the sample diagram).

2.2.5.8.1 Rectangular Side Surfacing

Format: G70.04(G02/G03)I_(P_)X_Y_Z_U_V_W_(L_/R_ D_ F_)

"G70.04 Rectangular Side Surfacing (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box

The outside-in side surfacing and inside-out side surfacing of the rectangular share this
dialog box, in the side surfacing machining direction, I0 and I1 will be used to indicate
outside-in side surfacing or inside-out side surfacing.
 Orientation (G): The cutting orientation can be clockwise (CW, G02) or
counterclockwise (CCW , G03).
 Direction (I): Outside in or Inside out, which will be shown as I0/I1 command in the
program.
 Step In Axis (P): can be Not Defined, + 1st Axis, + 2nd Axis, - 1st Axis, and - 2nd Axis,
which will be shown as P0~P4 command in the program. The orientation of 1st axis
and 2nd axis are depends on the working plane (G17/G18/G19).
 Center X/Y/Z: center of side surfacing. It can be absolute positions or incremental
values.
 Length/Depth of X/Y/Z axis: In G17 mode (X-Y plane), Length/Depth X and Y (U and
V value) define length and width of the side surfacing. Length/Depth Z (W value)
defines depth of side surfacing and the value is negative.
 If users enter values in both text boxes of Corner Rounding (R value) and

77 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Chamfering (L value), the later one will be ignored.

 Tilt Angle (D value): the angle that rectangular tool path tilted with.
 Feed Rate (F value): the velocity at which the cutter is fed, the system will adopt the
value set last time if users do not make any changes.
 Users need to set the number of tool table (D_) and the tool radius before
processing side surfacing machining.

Rectangular Side Surfacing (Outside in)

Rectangular Side Surfacing (Inside out)

2.2.5.8.2 Circular Side Surfacing

Format: G70.05(G02/G03)I_(P_)X_Y_Z_ R_U_(F_)

78 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"G70.05 Circular Side Surfacing (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box

 Orientation (G): The cutting orientation can be clockwise (CW, G02) or

counterclockwise (CCW , G03).
 Direction (I): Outside in or Inside out, which will be shown as I0/I1 command in the
program.
 Step In Axis (P): can be Not Defined, + 1st Axis, + 2nd Axis, - 1st Axis, and - 2nd Axis,
which will be shown as P0~P4 command in the program. The orientation of 1st axis
and 2nd axis are depends on the working plane (G17/G18/G19).
 Center X/Y/Z: center of circular side surfacing. It can be absolute positions or
incremental values.
 Radius (R value): the radius of the circular side surfacing circle.
 U/V/W Depth (U value) defines the depth of the side surfacing circular.
 Feed Rate (F value): the velocity at which the cutter is fed, the system will adopt the
value set last time if users do not make any changes.
 Users need to set the number of tool table (D_) and the tool radius before
processing side surfacing machining.
 The outside-in side surfacing and inside-out side surfacing of the circular share this
dialog box, in the side surfacing machining direction, I0 and I1 will be used to
indicate outside-in side surfacing or inside-out side surfacing.

79 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Circular Side Surfacing (Outside in)

Circular Side Surfacing (Inside out)

2.2.5.9 Surfacing Machining

Format: G70.06 D_X_Y_Z_U_V_W_C_I_F_

"G70.06 Surfacing (Metric Mode)" Dialog Box

1. There are four surfacing types:

80 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Four Surfacing Types

(1) Left  Right/without Tilt (D0)

The tool processes surfacing machining by moving along X-axis a distance of
Length/Depth X (U value) and then turn to Y-axis, moving along Y-axis a distance
of StepInWidth. Next, the tool turns to X-axis and moves along a distance of
Length/Depth X (U value) and turn to Y-axis again, moving along Y-axis a
distance of StepInWidth. The tool repeats the above procedures until the
surfacing machining is finished.
(2) Up  Down/without Tilt (D1)

The tool processes surfacing machining by moving along Y-axis a distance of

Length/Depth Y (V value) and then turn to X-axis, moving along X-axis a distance
of StepInWidth. Next, the tool turns to Y-axis and moves along a distance of
Length/Depth Y (V value) and turn to X-axis again, moving along X-axis a
distance of StepInWidth. The tool repeats the above procedures until the
surfacing machining is finished.
(3) Left to Right/with Tilt (D2)

The tool processes surfacing machining by moving along X-axis a distance of

Length/Depth X (U value) and then turns back to the opposite direction of X-axis
tiltedly. The tool repeats the above procedures until the surfacing machining is
finished.
(4) Up to Down/with Tilt (D3)

The tool processes surfacing machining by moving along Y-axis a distance of

Length/Depth Y (V value) and then turns back to the opposite direction of Y-axis
tiltedly. The tool repeats the above procedures until the surfacing machining is
finished.
2. The sequence of surfacing machining is below:
(1) The tool move rapidly to start position (Xs, Ys) and start height, which is Center Z
(Z value) + Clearance (C value).

81 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

(2) The tool descends to Length/Depth Z (W value) with Feed Rate (F value) and
starts surfacing machining.
(3) When surfacing machining command is finished, the tool ascends to start height
and stay at center position Center X/Y (X,Y).
3. The values of Center X/Y/Z (X, Y, Z value) can be absolute positions or incremental
values.
4. Length/Depth X (U value) and Length/Depth Y (V value) define the axial length
of X-axis and Y-axis.
5. There are four percentage options (150%, 125%, 100%, 75%) for the surfacing
width. Users can select from "F2→Parameter→Cancycle
Parameters→StepInWidth".

Surfacing Machining (D1 type)

2.2.5.10 Contour Pocket Side Surfacing Machining

Any closed contour shape can be automatically cut the contour side surfacing
machining with tool compensation.

格式：G70.11 P_X_Y_Z_(U/V/W_)(C_)R_I_(F_)

82 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"G70.11 Contour Pocket Side Surfacing (Metric Mode)" Dialog Box

 Compensation Type: Left/Right.

 Subroutine No (P): number of subprogram which describes shape of the pocket. The
subprogram is named after Oxxxx and follows main program.
 Offset/Start Hgt X/Y (X, Y): offset distance between the object and current position.
 Offset/Start Hgt Z (Z value): Z-axis value of the upper edge of the object.
 Clearance (C value): the safe starting height for machining.
 U/V/W Depth (U value): the depth of the pocket. The value is negative.
 Approach Radius (R value): the tangent entry/exit radius of fine cut.
 Spindle Feed Rate (I value): feed rate of spindle. Please refer to INCON-
M84/M86/M86R Integration Manual for more information.
 Feed Rate (F value): the velocity at which the cutter is fed, the system will adopt the
value set last time if users do not make any changes.

Contour Pocket Side Surfacing Machining

83 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.2.6 Command Modification Aid

Press F3 to enter "EDIT" mode. By selecting "Command Modification Aid" from the
"Edit" menu, the system will automatically recognize the command of the current block
and pop up corresponding dialog box for users to modify the values or preferences. If
the current block does not belong to any default command, there will be a "Command
Line" dialog box that helps users modify the block directly (Please refer to Shortcut
Keys for the quick key function). Users can modify the command or values in the data
fields by using hotkeys.

Note 1: "Command Modification Aid" command is only available in "EDIT" mode.

Note 2: Users can also access to "Command Insertion Aid" and "Command
Modification Aid" by using shortcut keys Alt+F4 and Alt+F5.

"Command Line" Dialogue Box

2.2.7 Teach In

Select the "Teach In" item, a line of instructions will be inserted in the editor's cursor.
The instruction will be taught according to the axis specified in the parameters to be
taught. The values are respectively the program position values in each axis. For
example, if the position of the program is (123.000, 100.120) and both axis specify

84 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

the teaching, a line instruction such as X123.000 Y100.120 will be inserted in the
program, and X123.000 if only X-axis teaching is specified.

While editing a machining program, you can use the panel to manually move the tool
point by tapping the surface point of the original workpiece model, and press the Alt+T
key at the same time to insert the current specified axis program position value into
the program.

Note: The axis to be taught can be set by "F2→Parameter→Teach In Axis".

2.2.8 Compute Radius

The system provides the function of calculating the circle radius determined by the
three points that are not on the same straight line. Place the cursor on the command
line after the three points to be calculated, and then select this function from
"F2→Edit→Compute Radius" , Or enter the manual mode while editing and press
ALT+R to calculate the radius, and the second and third lines will automatically replace
the calculated G02/G03 code.

Note 1: This function can only be operated in absolute coordinate mode, and the X
and Y values of these three lines must be present.
Note 2: If the specified three points exist in a straight line, the system will send an
error message.

Example:
Program before calculating the radius is:
G00 X+000.000 Y+000.000
G01 X+003.000 Y+004.000
G01 X+000.000 Y+004.000

If the cursor after the third line, and in manual mode by ALT+R, the program will
become:
G00 X+000.000 Y+000.000
G03 X+003.000 Y+004.000 R+002.500
G03 X+000.000 Y+004.000 R+002.500

85 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.3 Program Running (F2→R)

"F2→Run" Pull-down Menu

Note: The following describes the program origin of the first three items "Run
Program", "Run from Middle", "Simulate", to be in "Parameter→Run
State→Set Run Mode" of "Program" and "DNC" as one of the sources. If the
source of the program is "DNC", "DNC" in status window will be highlight.
The current file source state will be shown in state window as PROGRAM or
DNC (Please refer to System State Window).

2.3.1 Run Program

From the "Run" menu, select "Run Program" or press F9 to run the program when the
run state shown in state window is "PROGRAM". The program will run from the current
position of cursor and ignore all the command codes in previous blocks. Please
reconfirm the cursor position before running the program.

Note: The F9 key can also be replaced with the Cycle Start button by the machine
parameter setting. Contact the original machine manufacturer.

86 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.3.2 Run from Middle

When the program source is "Program", a dialog box will appear from "F2→Run→Run
from Middle" as shown below.

"Run From Middle" Dialog Box

This option is used when an event has occurred and must be temporarily interrupted.
After the event is cleared, it can be resumed from the point of interruption. In case of
interruption, it is necessary to note the PP value and TP value in the status display area.
If the interrupt is in the subprogram, the subprogram name and the number of calling
at that time L_ must also be noted to obtain the program to the previous line Location
and execution status, in order to continue as the basis for the actual follow-up, and by
the cursor refers to the line began to continue to implement.

 Program Name ： This item will display the main program name. If the program
execution is interrupted by a subroutine and you want to start
execution at a subroutine interrupt, change this data field to
the subroutine name.
 Start Line ： Command line number to start execution. When the dialog
box is opened, the line number of the cursor at that time will
be displayed. Please enter the PP value in the state display
area (the command line number when the program stops
executing).
 Start Task No ： Enter the TP value in the state display area (task no when the
program stops executing) for the task no to be started.

87 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

 Hit Count ： From the implementation of the command line to be

implemented when the first L_ implementation.
 Start String ： This field allows the user to search for a string in a machining
program (for example: M6T1) to start the program from the
line containing the string.

When "DNC" appears in the system state display area, "F2→Run→Run from Middle"
will pop up "Open Direct Run File from Hard Disk" dialog box, as shown in the
following figure, select the desire DNC file and press the ENTER key, the dialog box
"Run from Middle" will pop up for setting. Enter the name of the DNC program and
the line number (PP value) of the command to be executed formally.

"Open Direct Run File from Hard Disk" Dialog Box

After confirming the settings in the dialog box, the simulation will be executed from
the beginning to the line before the start line. At this moment, a "Confirm" dialog box
will appear to remind the user to confirm again whether the state of M, S, T has been
restored in advance, if not, please skip this dialog box first, set the state of M, S, T in
MDI mode, and then reset the above dialog box. When all the settings are completed,
the system will start execution according to the set conditions.

88 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

""Confirm" Dialog Box

Note 1: Start string and start line will only be used as one. If there is an input string
in the start string, the setting of start line will be ignored.
Note 2: The M, S, T codes in the program cannot be actually executed in this
simulation. Therefore, the user must input the M, S, T codes to be executed
in MDI before the simulation to restore to continue execution status.

2.3.3 Simulate

"Simulate" will simulate the execution program and display the simulation path
graphically under the simulation speed in "F2→Parameter→Run State→Simulate
Speed". This function allows the user to verify the program before actual machining
Correctness.

2.3.4 Stop

Press "F2→Run→Stop" or press F10 key, "Emergency Stop" button, will immediately
abort and give up the program to continue.

2.3.5 Hold

Press "F2→Run→Hold" or press F8 to pause the program immediately. Press F9 again

89 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

to resume execution.

2.3.6 Step

When "F2→Run→Step" is selected, "SST" in state window will be highlighted and only
one line at a time with each F9 key pressed; however, if the "Step" status is off the
program will be executed continuously, after pressing the F9 key.

Note: The "Machine Lock", "Spindle Axis Lock", "Dry Run", "Block skip" and
"Optional Hold" are the five states of the bi stable switch that the function is
on or off. When you press F9 key to start the program, the system will
automatically check the status of these five, and according to the
implementation of the state.

2.3.7 Conditional Hold

Conditional hold function, from "F2→Run→Conditional Hold" to open the

"Conditional Hold" dialog box, as shown below.

"Conditional Hold" Dialogue Box

 Hold G00: When this selection is selected, execution will be suspended until the
program line containing the G00 instruction is executed.
 Hold Line No: Select this selection to hold the program execution to a specific line

90 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

number, which is set in the Hold Line No field in the dialog box. (For example, if you
enter 50 in the Hold Line No field, the program will be paused on line 50)
 Hold Char String: Select this selection to hold the program execution to the program
line containing the specific string, which is set by the Hold Char String field in the
dialog box. (For example, if X43.448 is input in the Hold Char String field, the
program execution will be paused until the program line containing the X43.448
string)

If the above three selections are all checked, and the line number and the string are
also key in the Hold Line No and the Hold Char String field, the program executes to
the line containing the G00 command, the specified line number and the specific string
Will be suspended. If you only check the Hold Line No or Hold Char String option but
no line number or string is key in the field below, the function will not work.

2.3.8 Machine Lock

When this function is selected, "MLK" in state window will be highlighted. In this case,
the bed does not actually move. This function can be used with the screen drawing
mode as a new program check. Turn off this function, if you want to actually move the
bed.

2.3.9 Spindle Axis Lock

When this function is selected, "SLK" in state window will be highlighted. During the
execution of the program, the spindle is locked in the axial direction and the other axis
are still programmed. This function is often used as a new program check.

2.3.10 Dry Run

When this function is selected, "DRY" in state window will be highlighted, and the
program will run at dry run speed. This function is often used as a new program

91 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

checking. The running speed is set by "Machine Parameter→Motion and Speed". If

you need to change the value, please contact the machine factory.

2.3.11 Block skip

When this function is selected, "/SK" (INCON-M470/M670) or "/" (INCON-M675) in

state window will be highlighted, and the program will skip the single line with "/" at
the front will not be executed. This function can be changed at any time with the
CTRL+F4 key.

2.3.12 Optional Hold

When this option is selected, "M01" in state window will be highlighted. At this time,
when the program runs through M01, the program execution will be paused like the
M00 function until F9 key is pressed again. When this M01 status is cleared, M01 will be
ignored when M01 is executed and the program will resume. This function can be
changed at any time with the CTRL+F5 key.

Note: When the program is executed, the states of "Machine Lock", "Spindle Axis
Lock" and "Dry Run" cannot be changed, and "Block skip" or "Optional Hold"
can be changed at any time.

2.3.13 MDI

Select "MDI" or press F7, to switch to the "MDI" dialog box, you can type more than
one-block program. After pressing the F9 or Cycle Start button, the line where the
cursor is located will be executed immediately. Be sure to pay attention to the safety
on the machine side. Entering a one-line program on the MDI dialog box will be saved
on the hard disk. When the dialog box opens, press the ↑ and ↓ keys to switch the
cursor position and select the one-line program to be executed.

92 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

When the program encounters M00/M01 and suspends execution, MDI can temporarily
input one-line program execution. However, in the case of tool radius compensation
command, it will be stopped with M00/M01. In order to avoid affecting the original
machining path of the program, any G code command of axial motion input by MDI
will not be accepted and only G code of partial status change will be accepted
instruction.

2.3.13.1 Call MDI Dialog Box in Manual Mode

In manual control mode, press ALT+F7 to call the MDI dialog box. However, the MDI
dialog box executed in manual mode can only execute G54~G59 and G54.1 P_
instructions.

Call MDI Dialogue box in Manual Mode

2.3.14 DNC

This function allows you to execute the program directly without having to open it in
the editor so that the program can be executed directly without limitation of the
editor's 5MB capacity.

93 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Note 1: If execution is performed by "Run→DNC", the execution status bar in the

system state display area will not be changed.
Note 2: When "DNC" appears in the system status display area, "DNC" in the "Run"
menu is the same as the "DNC" in the "Run" menu. Press F3 to switch the
hard disk DNC or USB DNC.

DNC File Executing Screen

2.3.15 DNC M30 Nonstop

This function is a bi stable switch that changes only the role of "M30" in the system state
display area on or off. Under normal circumstances (that is, "M30" in state window is
highlighted), the program execution M30 will stop execution.

When this item is selected, M30 in state window will not be highlighted. In this case,
DNC will continue executing the program when it is executed to M30. The user can click
"Run→DNC" to open the "Run File List" dialog box. At this point, use the arrow keys
(↑, ↓, ←, →) and press the INS key to select and add the file to be executed. If the
selection is finished, press the ESC key to leave and return to the "Run File List" dialog
box. Press DEL Delete the selected file in the list.

94 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"Run File List" and "Make Run File List" Dialogue Boxes

2.3.15.1 Show Run File List

In DNC execution mode, and when "DNC M30 Nonstop" is selected ("M30" in state
window will not be highlighted), the user can press Cycle Start key or F9 key during
program execution, the controller screen will pop up the "Run File List" dialog box to
display the file list that is set to execute in DNC execution mode. In the "Run File List"
dialog box, the name of the program being executed is displayed in blue. Press ENTER
or ESC to leave this dialog box.

"Run File List" Dialogue Box

95 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.3.16 Graphics

From "F2→Run→Graphics" or press F6 key, the screen will display the tool path display
window. For details, please refer to Graph Mode.

2.4 Manual Mode (F2→M)

"F2→Manual" Pull-down Menu

Select "Increment", "Jog", "Hand Wheel", "Home" these four will jump out of Manual
Control Window.

2.4.1 Inc: Incremental Moves

Select an axis by using X, Y, Z or C, and select the direction (backward/forward) by using

left/right arrow key (←, →). Each time the left/right arrow key is pressed, the machine
moves along the selected axis with the selected increment. Press F4/F5 to
increase/decrease the increment steps (STEP: 1, 10, 100 or 1000).

2.4.2 Jog: Continuous Moves

Select an axis by using X, Y, Z or C, and select the direction (backward/forward) by using

left/right arrow key. Press left/right arrow key (←, →) once and the machine jogs along
the selected axis. Press left/right arrow key (←, →) again to stop the machine. The
jogging feed rate is set by the machine maker.

96 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.4.3 Wheel: Hand Wheel

The hand wheel must be properly installed by the machine maker beforehand. Select
an axis by using X, Y, Z or C, and operate the hand wheel to move the machine along
the selected axis with the selected increment. Press F4/F5 to increase/decrease the
increment steps (STEP: 1, 10 or 100).

2.4.4 Home: Home Return

The operation steps of resetting each axis are similar to the operation steps of "Jog".
The home position of each axis returning to zero has been set by the machine
manufacturer in advance. Therefore, pressing any ← and → key will automatically
return to Home after selecting the axis. For safety, it is recommended to Home the Z
axis first, and then the X or Y axis. If there is a dangerous situation during the Homing
process, press the Emergency Stop button to stop; if the system is absolute, no need
to operate the Home.

Note 1: The order of Home of each axis can be set in "Machine Parameter→Motion
and Speed→Home Sequence". For details, refer to INCON-
M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) Integration Manual.
Note 2: If vto signal of PLC was used to switch the controller to MPG mode when
doing homing procedure in manual mode, the homing procedure would be
terminated immediately. Users have to press F10 to exit manual mode.
INCON-M470/M670 from system version 5.05R or higher, using vto signal
of PLC to switch the controller to MPG mode is not allowed when doing
homing procedure in manual mode. It cannot be switched to MPG mode
until homing procedure is finished. This function is available for all system
versions of INCON-M675.

97 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.4.5 Relative Position Reset

The relative position (RX/RY/RZ/RA/RB/RC) shown in coordinate position window can

be reset by selecting "Relative Position Reset" from the "Manual" menu and there will
be a "Reset Relative Position" dialogue box. Select one or more axes to be reset by
using arrow keys (↑, ↓, ←, →) and then press SPACE to confirm the selection. Press
ENTER to close the dialogue box and the selected axes will be zeroed at the same time,
as shown below.

""Reset Relative Position" Dialogue Box

Reset Z-axis Relative Position

2.4.6 Teach-in Program Position

Manual control dialog box listed below the auxiliary quick keys, can conduct teaching
style program-type location settings, the meaning is as follows:
 Press ALT + X/Y/Z/A/B/C : The axis program position can be reset to zero.
 Press CTRL + X/Y/Z/A/B/C : The axis program position can be halved.

98 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

 Press SHIFT + X/Y/Z/A/B/C : This axis can be set to any value.

Note 1: At the same time, the coordinate offset will be set in the coordinate system
displayed by G54~G59 in the state window.
Note 2: It is not possible to switch to the tool path trace display during manual
control operation.

2.4.7 Angle Axis Program Position Teaching Setting

Only the angle axis or rotary axis function is valid, provided from the system version
5.14B (INCON-M670), 5.15B (INCON-M675).

Use the steps (Take C-axis for Example):

1. Record the first point when pressing ALT+C.
2. Move the X and Y axes behind.
3. Press CTRL+C again to record the second point, and calculate the
offset angle of the C-axis at this time and input it into the current
coordinate offset.

Note: The X/Y plane determines the C-axis offset angle, the Y/Z plane determines
the A-axis offset angle, and the X/Z plane determines the B-axis offset angle.

2.4.8 Quick Manual Setting Tool Length

After entering manual mode, press the shortcut key "F6 Tool Table" to jump out of the
"Tool Table" dialog box, the user can use the "F4 Teach Length" to set the tool length
value directly, press ENTER after the tool length value will be recorded directly in the H
group, press ESC to abandon the set tool length and return to manual mode.

99 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"Tool Table" Dialog Box (M470/M670)

"Tool Table" Dialog Box (M675)

2.4.9 Hold-Normal Manual

If this option is selected in the machine parameter setting, the machine will move to
the position where the program is paused after user leaving the manual mode, during
this time press the Cycle Start button to continue the program execution.

Note: INCON-M470/M670 from system version 5.07G or higher, users can use NC
COMMAND to switch Hold-Normal Manual mode. For further information,
please refer to INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) PLC Manual.

2.4.10 Manual Retract in Normal Direction

In some cases, such as cutting off a program during machining, to retract the tool in
the normal direction of the tool, you can use the manual retraction function in the

100 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

normal direction using the following instructions:

1. Enter the G168 mode using MDI (Single Line Entry).

2. Open "Manual" dialog box, press ALT+B and ALT+C to set program coordinate
values of B-axis and C-axis to 0.
3. At this point, the tool can be manually exited in the normal direction (Z+ direction).

2.4.11 Set G158 Offset in Manual Mode

In manual mode, you can use manual mode to move the motion axis directly and then
set the desired G158 offset rotation teaching value to the corresponding offset group.

Before entering manual mode, input G158 L_ by MDI to enter G158 mode and select
the offset group to be set, and then press F4 to enter manual mode. At this time, single-
action, jog and handwheel movement can be used to move X, Y, Z, B (A), C axis, and
then use the following method to set the coordinate system translation rotation value
to be set.

 Set the offset value: Use ALT, CTRL, SHIFT plus X, Y, Z to set the offset value. This
part is the same as the original setting of G54. Since it is G158 mode, the offset will
be set to the value of G158 offset the table of X, Y, Z value. In addition, the offset
table U_, V_, W_ value will be set to 0 at the same time.
 Set rotation value: There are A_, B_, C_ values in the offset table of G158, which
represent the equivalent rotation value of P00159 (BC axis mechanism) or P00155
(AC axis mechanism). First move the B (A) and C axes manually so that the tool
orientation is the Z direction of the new coordinate system to be set, that is, the tool
is perpendicular to the XY plane of the new coordinate system. When in place, press
the ALT+B (BC axis mechanism type) or ALT+A (AC axis mechanism type), the A_
and B_ values in the offset table are automatically filled in with the appropriate
values.

In this case, rotate the Z-axis in the new coordinate system again and move the X and

101 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Y manually. In this case, the X and Y positions are not in the (0,0) position. If you press
ALT+C, it means the current position of X and Y is the positive X-axis position of the
new coordinate system. The controller will set the C_ value in the offset table.

Similarly, after moving X and Y, the dialog box input angle value will be displayed when
SHIFT+C is pressed, so that the current X and Y positions are in the angle position of
the new coordinate system.

"C Axis Program Position" Dialogue Box (INCON-M675)

When setting the A_, B_, C_ values in the offset table in the above manner, the values
of U_, V_, and W_ in the offset table are also set to 0 at the same time.

 Set the re-offset value: Set the U_, V_, W_ offset values in the offset table by using
ALT, CTRL and SHIFT together with U, V and W, and set the coordinates of the
current X, Y and Z programs to 0 (ALT), 1/2 (CTRL), enter the value of the dialog
(SHIFT). This setting is usually set after setting the first offset value and rotation value.

Please note: leave the manual dialog box if you press ENTER to leave, then just set the
value will be set stored in the offset table, if you press ESC to leave, the offset table
value will remain in the manual dialog before entering the original value.

102 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.5 Parameter (F2→P)

The parameter pull down menu of INCON-M470/M670/M675 have different items due
to different state and data setting.

INCON-M470/M670 items are as follow:

 Attribute
 Coordinate Offsets
 Reference Positions
 Tool Table
 Tool Length Measurement
 4th Axis ★
 Cancycle Parameters
 Macro Variable Table
 Scaling Magnitudes
 Rotation Angle
 Extra G54 Coordinate Offsets
 Extra Attribute
 Run State
 Teach In Axis
 User Management
 Advanced Mode (refer to Safety Level)
Note: ★ Available for M470/M670 only.

INCON-M675 items are as follow:

 Attribute
 Coordinate Offsets
 Reference Positions
 Tool Table
 Tool Length Measurement
 Cancycle Parameters
 Macro Variable Table

103 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

 Scaling Magnitudes
 Rotation Angle
 Extra G54 Coordinate Offsets
 Extra Attribute
 G158 Coordinate Offsets ★
 5 Axes Attribute ★
 Run State
 Teach In Axis
 User Management
 User Defined Machine Data ★
 Advanced Mode (refer to Safety Level)
Note 1: ★ Available for M675 only.
Note 2: If there are missing items in actual pull down menu, please refer to User
Management→Management.

Parameters can refer to, confirm or set some program execution-related states or data,
the pull-down menu as shown below.

"F2→Parameter" Pull-down Menu (M470/M670)

104 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"F2→Parameter" Pull-down Menu (M675)

2.5.1 Attribute

When selected, the "Attribute" dialog box appears as shown below, will appear. To set
the boot options, language version, time zone, IP, address, screen saver delay ... and so
on. When the cursor below the item indicates there is this data field, you can use the
PGUP/PGDN or ↑↓ keys to move arrow.

"Default Status" Dialogue Box

2.5.1.1 Check Item

This area option is used to set the default state when the system is powered on. Use
the SPACE key to change the state of the selected item.

105 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.5.1.1.1 ESC to save modified program

If you select this item, the modified program is automatically saved when the ESC key
is pressed. If you do not select this item, then after pressing ESC key there will be a pop
up confirmation dialog box to confirm whether to deposit this program. Press Y for yes
and N for no.

2.5.1.1.2 Error message for tool compensation overcut

When tool radius compensation, if two adjacent segments tool radius compensation
have over-cutting phenomenon and this item has selected, an error message will be
displayed and the execution will be stopped. Otherwise, the controller will decide the
better path to continue cutting.

2.5.1.1.3 Arc corner for tool compensation

If this item has selected, all corner paths during tool radius compensation will be arc
processed.

2.5.1.1.4 Treat no dot as with dot

If this item has selected, the command value without a decimal point in the instruction
will be treated as a decimal point. Example: X1234, if selected, will be considered as
X1234. Otherwise, it will be regarded as X1.234.

2.5.1.1.5 Message for closing manual window

When this item has selected, during manual operation, when the program offset has
changed, a confirmation message appears when the manual dialog box is closed.

106 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.5.1.1.6 Not switch graph plane automatically (END key)

If this item has selected, the trace window will not automatically switch the display
plane according to G17/G18/G19. The user can use END key to make changes.

2.5.1.1.7 On startup, reopen the last CNC file used

If this option has selected, the CNC file last executed before the last shutdown will be
automatically displayed on the next power-on.

2.5.1.1.8 CS to run Hard Disk DNC

If this item has not selected, when the DNC function of the hard disk is executed, select
the file to be executed and press the ENTER key to start the execution. If you select this
item, after selecting the file to be executed, press the Cycle Start button to execute the
hard disk DNC file.

2.5.1.1.9 Esc to close parameter dialog

If this item has selected, after opening a certain parameter dialog box and making
changes, press ENTER to save only the changes without closing the dialog box. Press
ESC again to close the parameter dialog box. If this is not selected, when ENTER is
pressed, the changes will be saved and the parameters dialog will be closed. When ESC
is pressed, only the parameters dialog will be closed and the changes will not be saved.

2.5.1.1.10 On startup, use Macro Type B

If this item has selected, the controller will use macro mode B when powered on, and if
not, the controller will use macro mode A. This item is available only for INCON-

107 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

M470/M670 from system version 5.09 or higher.

2.5.1.1.11 Use Type B Tool Compensation

If this option has selected, tool compensation mode B will be used when the controller
is powered on. If not selected, the controller will use tool compensation mode A
(original tool compensation mode).

Effective cutter compensation values in tool compensation modes A and B are as

follows:
 Tool compensation mode A:
Effective tool radius compensation value = tool radius compensation value - tool
radius wear value
 Tool compensation mode B:
Effective tool radius compensation value = tool radius compensation value + tool
radius wear value

Note: This item is available only for INCON-M470/M670 from system version 5.09B
or higher.

2.5.1.2 Language

Language can be set to English or traditional Chinese or Others. After changing the
language settings, you need to reboot to finish the change.

2.5.1.3 Time Zone

Allow users to set the time zone of the machine. For example, to enter "+80" in Taiwan
or "-50" for east coast of the United States, "GMT" on the screen means Greenwich
Mean Time.

108 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.5.1.4 Address

Please enter the CNC controller's web address here to make a network connection. The
CNC controller is a file server (FTP Server), the computer connected to it is the client
(Client).

INCON-M470/M670/M675 Outer panel RJ-45 connector on the network interface to

connect to the Internet. Most of the general line number of corporate network
planning Class C network level, that is the first three figures for the network number,
the last number is the host number. Therefore, the first three digits of the address of
INCON-M470/M670/M675 must be the same as the other computers in the company.
However, the last digit must be assigned a number by the network manager of the user
company (usually one of 1 to 254) To avoid the same IP address with other personal
computers, otherwise it will cause the network to collide, resulting in unable to connect
to the Internet. When IP is set to 0.0.0.0, the DHCP function is enabled to automatically
grab the IP location. For other network level settings, please contact your company's
professional network administrator.

Address

2.5.1.5 Screen Saver Delay (Minute)

To set the screen saver delay from start time, when the screen idle time exceeds this
setting, it will automatically enter the screen saver state. When entering the screen
saver state, there will INCON-M84/M86/M86R string on the screen to move, press any
key to restore to the original screen. If the delay time is set to 0 minutes, it means that
the screen saver function is disabled.

109 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.5.1.6 Max G60 Turn Angle

Refers to the angle between two adjacent paths, in G60 mode, do not perform the in-
position check. However, when the angle between the two moving paths is greater
than the setting of this parameter, the in-position check will still be performed so that
the processing of the larger corner will not be distorted due to the non-performing in-
position check to ensure the acute angle of the workpiece as shown in the following
figure. If this maximum G60 rotation value is set to "0", the in-position check will not
be performed.

(A) Turn Angle > Max G60 Turn Angle, (B) Turn Angle < Max G60 Turn Angle

2.5.1.7 Speed Down Ratio

The CNC program often has many continuous small line segments which may cause
over-cutting during high-speed cutting. However, if the limit check of each segment is
made, the cutting speed will be slowed down again. Speed down ratio can make the
controller in place check and continuous cutting between the two extreme conditions,
do moderate processing. The ratio range of 100% to 1%, the ratio of the greater the
bias toward high speed, the smaller the bias to high precision. 0% means the function
is temporarily disabled.

When the speed down ratio setting is negative, the system will not perform the exact
final speed check when performing high speed and high precision. This check uses the
rotary encoder of the axial servomotor to detect the true speed of each block. When
this speed is not greater than the final speed calculated by the system, the next block
can be started. In the absence of testing, the processing speed will be faster, but in
some places there will be less sharp acute angle situation.

110 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.5.2 Coordinate Offsets

Coordinate offset system is used to set G54~G59 and additional coordinate offset value,
and displays the current coordinate offset value of G92 and G52.

"Coordinate Offsets (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box (M470)

"Coordinate Offsets (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box (M670/M675)

G92 offset and G52 offset are set by G92 and G52 respectively. The lower part of the
dialog box is for user's reference, in order to estimate the offset value of each group of
work coordinates. G54~G59 program coordinate offset If adding extra coordinate
offset in the dialog box, a new G54~G59 coordinate system will be generated. This is
usually used to temporarily find the tool with wear but without modifying the program,
it will set this extra coordinate offset.

111 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

INCON-M470/M670 from system version 5.12C or higher, INCON-M675 from system

version 5.10M or higher, after the program to change the value in the table offset
coordinates, press OK to return to the editor window, when the program enters the
offset coordinate table again, the cursor will stop at the time of the last to leave the
table fields.

The CNC controller design can assist in setting the work coordinate offset value
method, the steps are as follows:
 Move the tool to the origin of pre work coordinate manually first.
 Press "Parameter→Coordinate Offsets" to turn on, and then use TAB key to select
each axis field of work coordinate. At this time, pressing F4 key will automatically
calculate the axis work coordinate offset value and fill in this field. The program
position of this axis will change to 0.
 Use the TAB key to select the other axis offset values for this group and teach it
automatically in this way (press the F4 key), then press the ENTER key to save.
 If you want to set the work offset value of other groups, repeat the above steps.
 If F7 is substituted for F4 in the above procedure, the coordinate offset will be
calculated by replacing the program position with the relative position, and the
relative position of the axis will become zero.

2.5.3 Reference Positions

When this item is selected, a "Reference Positions" dialog box will appear to set the
offset value of the four reference points to the mechanical origin. In the system, the
first reference position is the value set by the first reference point in the following
dialog box, but the second, third and fourth reference points are the sum of their
respective set points and the first reference point set point.

112 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"Reference Position (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box (M470)

"Reference Position (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box (M670/M675)

2.5.4 Tool Table

When this item is selected, a "Tool Table" dialog box will appear. The following table
shows Length, Radius, Length Wear, Radius Wear and Measure Height.

"Tool Table (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box (M470/M670)

113 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"Tool Table (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box (M675)

 This tool table has a total of 1024 groups.

 Length: The tool length correction value, which is compared with the standard
length of the tool value. Therefore, according to the length can be positive or
negative.
 Length = current machine position - the reference height of the machine position
value.
 Radius: The tool radius compensation value can only be a positive value. It is
determined by G41/G42 to compensate the left or right.
 Length Wear: The tool used for a long time there will be a tool length wear off, in
order to avoid often check the length of the compensation value, so the
compensation.
 The actual tool length compensation for Length + Length Wear.
 Radius Wear: The tool used for a long time there will be radius wear, in order to
avoid often check the tool radius compensation value, so the compensation.
 In the program, use the D_ code to select the tool radius compensation value in this
tool compensation table, and use the H_ code to select the tool length
compensation value in this tool compensation table.
 The tool radius compensation command in the program is G41 or G42, and the tool
length compensation command is G43.
 Extra Length: Convenient for the user to compensate the center of the ball
knife to the blade distance; Tool length compensation value = tool length +
Length Wear + Extra Length.
 INCON-M470/M670 from system version 5.12C or higher, INCON-M675 from
system version 5.10M or higher, after modifying tool table of values, press OK to

114 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

return to the editor window, when entering the tool table again, the cursor will stop
at the time of the last to leave the table fields.

Note: After press the shortcut key "F5 Offset Ref", the offset value of the Z-axis will
be written directly to the reference height field, and then the "F4 Teach
Length" can be used to quickly set the tool length value.

2.5.5 Tool Length Measurement

This item is used to set the relevant parameters required for automatic tool length
measurement.

"Tool Length Measurement Parameter (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box

 Search Speed: Do not set the speed too fast, so as not to crash the length probe.
 Detect Speed: Usually set very slow speed, so that the measurement results are
accurate.
 Retract Distance: This value should not be set too large to save time.
 Detect Distance: This value should not be set too large to protect the tools and
probe.

2.5.6 4th Axis

This item is used to set the 4th axis of the representative text, use the SPACE key to
switch to A, B, C, U, V or W.

115 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"4th Axis" Dialogue Box (M470)

"4th Axis" Dialogue Box (M670)

Note: INCON-M675 The 4th axis name and function can not be set above.

2.5.7 Cancycle Parameters

From the "Parameter" menu, select "Cancycle Parameters", there will be a "Cancycle
Parameters (Metric Mode)" dialog box.

"Cancycle Parameters (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box

 Cut In Retract Length: This is set in Can cycle's, G73 and G83 two drilling instructions'
retract the chip removal operation during machining and the distance of retraction
chip removal (unit: mm/inch). In the G70/G71 pocket machining instruction, there is

116 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

also a short-distance retraction action, and the retraction distance is also set
according to the set value.
 StepInWidth: In pocket processing, each layer of processing, a lap after processing
and then expand outward when the feed width of the width; this tool diameter feed
width of 75%, 100%, 125%, 150% Four items (as shown below), the actual amount of
feed for the percentage x tool radius.

Feed Width of The Four Options

2.5.8 Macro Variable Table

Select this item to display the setting macro variable table dialog box, as shown below.
Press "ALT+TAB" to switch to index.

"Macro Variable Table" Dialogue Box

2.5.9 Scaling Magnitudes

This item is used to set the effective scale of scale value (that is, the choice of three or
four digits after the decimal point) and the default scale enlargement and reduction
ratio of each axis in the G51 scale up/down instruction.

117 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"Default Scaling Parameter" Dialogue Box

2.5.10 Rotation Angle

This item is used to set the preset rotation angle of G68 coordinate rotation and it is
either absolute value or incremental value.

"Default Rotation Parameter (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box

 Rotation Angle Abs/Inc:

Defines the angle value in the instruction as absolute mode or incremental mode.
 Angle:

This value is used if there is no rotation angle value in the command.

Note: In the G68 command, the radius is absolute or incremental mode is

determined by the G90/G91 state of the program. The absolute or
incremental mode of the angle is determined by the absolute / absolute value
of "F2→Parameter→Rotation Angle" "Rotation Angle Abs/Inc" decision. In
addition, if the G68 is to be progressive, it must be in G91 mode and the dialog
must be "Incremental".

118 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.5.11 Extra G54 Coordinate Offsets

When this item is selected, an "Extra G54 Coordinate Offsets" dialog box will appear,
allowing you to set an extra G54 coordinate offset value of 128 groups. Users can
directly enter "G54.1 Pxxx" when editing programs (Pxxx can be P001 to P128 )
Represents the coordinate offset value to be used.

"Extra G54 Coordinate Offsets (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box (M470)

"Extra G54 Coordinate Offsets (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box (M670/M675)

2.5.12 Extra Attribute

Select this item to display "Extra Attribute" dialog box, which is used by the user to
select the usage mode.

119 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"Extra Attribute" Dialog Box

Check Item

[ ] Multi-line MDI:

If this item is checked, the system will use multi-line MDI. (for details, please refer to
Multi-Line MDI Edit Window)

[ ] Not close DNC Window after finish:

1. If this item is checked, the system will not close the DNC window after the
program finishes, so that the user knows the last execution program. The user
can press the ESC key to close or directly press CS to continue the next
program.
2. If this item is not checked, the system will close the DNC window after the
program finishes (as shown below).

"DNC" Window (Take INCON-M470 for Example)

120 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

[ ] Esc to close manual window:

1. This item is selected

(a) When "Enter" is pressed, only the coordinate offset is stored, and the
manual window is not closed.
(b) When "Esc" is pressed, the coordinate offset is not stored and only the
manual window is closed.
(c) When "Alt+O" is pressed, the coordinate offset system can be switched (as
shown below).

"Coordinate Offset" Dialog Box

2. This item is not selected

(a) When "Enter" is pressed, the coordinate offset is stored and the manual
window is closed.
(b) When "Esc" is pressed, the coordinate offset is not stored and only the
manual window is closed.

[ ] Non-Window key stroke:

1. If this item is selected, the user can use the ↑↓← → key to move through the
setting items of the tool table and the coordinate offset table.
2. If this item is not selected, the user can use the Tab key to move through the
setting items in the tool table and coordinate offset table.

121 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Note: Changing any of the options in this dialog box will require a reboot.

2.5.13 G158 Coordinate Offsets

The "G158 Coordinate Offsets" dialog box is opened by "Parameter→G158

Coordinate Offsets", the dialog box up to 100 sets of G158 coordinate system from 0
to 99.

"G158 Coordinate Offsets (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box

Each group has the value of X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_ U_ V_ W_. If the values are by G158
command or manual dialog box, the controller calculates the equivalent value of X_ Y_
Z_ A_ B_ C_ U_ V_ W_.

If the machine is AC axis machine, it is equivalent to the following instructions:

G158 P00155 X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_ U_ V_ W_

If the machine is a machine with a BC axis, it is equivalent to the following command:

G158 P00159 X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_ U_ V_ W_

 G158 coordinate offsets example

Example 1:
;Specify the fifth group of coordinate system
G158 L5
;First pull the tool along the spindle direction to the extreme position, and then specify the fifth group of coordinate system,
and the rotary axis to make the tool in parallel with the Z axis position

122 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G158 L5 P10000 Q1
;The first group of rotation modes specified by X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_ U_ V_ W_ are rotated around the X axis in order
A_value
;Then around the Y-axis select B_ value, and then select the C-value around the Z-axis rotation in order to specify the
coordinate system
G158 P00157 X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_ U_ V_ W_
;Group 1 rotation mode specified by X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_ U_ V_ W_ in incremental mode
;In order around the X-axis rotation A_ value, then around the Y-axis rotation B_ value, then around the Z-axis rotation C_
value
;Rotate in order to specify the coordinate system and turn the rotary axis so that the tool is parallel to the Z axis
G158 P11157 X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_ U_ V_ W_

Example 2: Processing program

%
G169
G54
G43 H2
G128 Q1
G0 B0. C0
;
M3S3000
;
; 1: eular, 59 = 111011, rotate Z then Y then Z
G158 Q1 L1 P10159 Q1 X0. Y0. Z85. A10. B20. C30. U0 V0 W0
;
M97 P2222
M97 P3333
M97 P4444
;
G169
G128 Q1
M5
M30

; drill a hole
O4444
G0 Z10.
G00X8.5Y7.4
G98
G81Z-3.R0.F200.
G0 Z10.
M99

; slot pocket
O3333
G00X2.Y18.Z10.
G01Z-2.F500.
....
G00Z10.
X2.Y18.
M99

; surfacing
O2222
G00X10.Y10.Z6.
X0.5Y19.5
G01Z0.F500.
....
G00Z6.
X10.Y10.
M99

123 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.5.14 5 Axes Attribute

"5 Axes Attribute" Dialogue Box

Check Item

[ ] Count center Z teach tool len:

Originally, when the dialog box of "Parameter→Tool Table" was opened, if the F4
teaching length was pressed, the CNC controller will automatically fill in the length field
of the Z-axis mechanical position value. If this item is selected, after the "Tool Table"
dialog box is opened, press F4 to teach the tool length, the controller will automatically
subtract the mechanical position value of the Z axis from the "5-axis rotary
mechanism" dialog box of the rotary axis reference surface Z position field set value,
then fill in the length compensation field.

When this item is selected, the calculated tool length compensation value when using
G37 automatic tool length measurement command will also be subtracted from the Z
position of the rotary axis reference plane of the "5-axis rotary mechanism" dialog
box in the machine parameter After setting the value of the field, enter the length field
of the "Tool Table" dialog box.

[ ] G168 F code use motion speed:

In the original G168 mode, the program specified in the F value for the tip point in the
program space speed. If this option is checked, the F value specified in the program in
G168 mode is the motion space speed. When this option is checked, the F value
displayed in the status window will automatically change to show the speed of the
motion space.

124 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

[ ] Show program space speed as G169:

If this item is selected, the real speed F_ displayed in the status window will not display
the real speed of the motion space in G169 mode, but will show the program space
speed. The value of the sts.realVSpeed signal seen by PLC is also the program space
speed. If the program has a single block moving B-axis and C-axis, then these sections
must be small section of a single section, the value of this speed will be more correct.

Note: Refer to INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) PLC Manual for PLC signal related

instructions.

[ ] Safe positioning as run from middle:

If this item is selected, the behavior first position action of run from middle in G158 or
G168 state is following safety process to position.

first positioning action to be performed from the starting behavior G158 or G168 when
it was executed is position in the following safety mode:
1. Raise the tool up to the limit of the single axis in a normal way.
2. Rotate the rotary axis to the target position from which it is to be performed.
3. Move X, Y, Z to the normal above the target line.
4. Move X, Y, Z and the straight line will be shifted to the target position in the normal
direction.

Please note: This function needs to match the software limits of X, Y and Z axis. If
software limit is not set, this function is invalid.

Note: This function applies from system version 5.06E.

 Five-axis machining related G code

G Code format Function

G168 G168 RTCP Open

G169 G169 RTCP Close
G178 G178 G00 RTCP Open

125 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G Code format Function

G179 G179 G00 RTCP Close

G158 G158 L_ P_ Q_ R_ X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_ U_ V_ W_ Title plan processing
G128 G128 Q_ R_ Tool extraction instruction

Special M code (M300~M399) does not affect the continuous motion function
INCON-M675 system provides, the use of special M code in the program will not be
due to the implementation of M code to stop the movement caused by the smooth
axial motion.

The range of special M codes is M300~M399, which can be found in PLC_HSK.H. In the
PLC must be given Finish signal immediately, so that M code and S code immediately
ended. Special M code must follow G01. If special M code is in a single line, it is the
same as general M code.

Program Example:
…
G01 X25.F4000 M399 S5000
G01 X50.F4000
G01 Y25.F4000 M399 S4000

2.5.15 Run State

This item dialog box is used to select the set run mode, key in simulate speed and part
count.

"Set Run State" Dialogue Box

126 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

 Set Run Mode: You can select the source of the execution program when the system
executes the program by pressing the execute key. If "Program" is selected, "DNC"
in the state window display area will not show a light blue background. If "DNC" is
selected, "DNC" in state window will be highlighted.
 Simulate Speed: The system is using simulate speed to simulate program when
system in simulated state.
 Part Count: The number of completed workpieces will be displayed in this data field.
Each execution of the M30 program ends, the workpiece value will be automatically
progressive plus one, the value will remain after the shutdown. PC:  item in the state
window will display this value.

Note: M95 and M97 can not be used in the DNC execution mode.

2.5.16 Teach In Axis

This item dialog box is to select the axis to be taught in "teach position" in manual
mode.

"Set Teach In Axis" Dialogue Box (M470)

"Set Teach In Axis" Dialogue Box (M670/M675)

127 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.5.17 User Management

In this pull-down menu, some of the items must be under safety state 1 to be used,
how to enter the safety level 1, please refer to Safety Level.

"User Management" Submenu (Take INCON-M470/M670 for Example)

2.5.17.1 Tool Life Table

This item has been selected will pop out "Tool Life Table" dialog box as below, total
1000 sets feed length and spindle time of tool on dialog box. Feed length is tool
cutting length, and the unit is m; spindle time is total time since start, and the unit is
sec. The tool will wear off during cutting, and too much tool wear off makes it
impossible for cutting. Tool life table provides feed length and spindle time to record
each tool status for tool management.

The setting value will reset to zero when tool has been changed, feed length is setting
by PLC M code, and PLC counts feed length and sends message for user to change tool.

"Tool Life Table (Metric Mode)" Dialogue Box

128 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Note: Feed length or spindle time must be set by PLC, please refer to INCON-
M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) PLC Manual.

2.5.17.2 Tool Compensation

The user can set the number of pre-check blocks according to the processing
requirements to define the maximum number of blocks to be used when performing
the over-cutting test. If the number of available blocks is less than this number, the
over-cutting test is performed based on the maximum number of blocks that can be
provided, but at least three blocks are required to execute the over-cutting test. The
maximum value of this value can be set to 10. If set to 0, no overcut detection is
performed.

"Tool Compensation" Dialogue Box

Overcut detection instructions

In the tool radius compensation mode, under certain conditions, overcut may occur
when the tool radius corresponds to too large a command path. A specific overcut will
be analyzed here, replacing the original path with the calculated possible path to avoid
over-damaging the workpiece.

The precondition for performing the overcut test is that there are at least three motion
commands. If this condition can not be met, the over-cutting test can not be performed
and the over-cutting phenomenon still occurs.

1. Overcut detection reference vector

129 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

This is the vector used to analyze the overcut detection, for convenience, is termed
the overcut detection reference vector.
(In the following illustration, the solid line represents the program path and the
dotted line represents the knife path)

(1) Outer path

When compensation is outer path, the overcut detects will refer to vector V as below
figure.

Outer Compensation Path

(2) Inner path

When compensation is inner path, the overcut detects will refer to vector V as below
figure.

Inner Compensation Path

2. Overcut Phenomenon

About overcut discussion will discuss. Overcut has cave sharp phenomenon and
pocket sharp phenomenon, and below section is going to discuss these two sharps.

(1) Cave sharp

130 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Cave Overcut

1. In the above figure, V1 is the overcut detection reference vector calculated by the
single section 1 and the single section 2, and V2 is the overcut detection reference
vector calculated by the single section 2 and the single section 3.
2. Connect V1 to V2 to become a vector Vg, compare Vg with a vector formed by a
single block 2, and if the angle difference is greater than or equal to 90 degrees
and less than or equal to 270 degrees, it is judged as over-cutting phenomenon.
3. If overcut occurs, then the tool radius compensation will ignore the single block 2,
and the single block 1 and the single block 3 will do the calculation of the normal
tool radius compensation. Therefore, after the compensation of the single block
1, the path will only go to point I, Block 2 will be ignored and the path to block 3
will be shown directly (as shown below).

Block 2 Will be Bypassed If Overcut Occurs

If the tool diameter is large, the angle difference between the direction from the start
point of single block 1 to the point I and the vector formed by single block 1 is greater
than or equal to 90 degrees or less than 270 degrees (as shown in the following figure),
then it is judged as a dangerous phenomenon. An error message will still be displayed
and the program execution will be stopped, even if "Error message for tool
compensation overcut" is not selected in the "F2→Parameter→Attribute" dialog box.

131 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Tangential Overcut Dangerous Phenomenon

(2) Pocket Overcut

Pocket Overcut

Suppose that N is the number of command blocks to execute overcut check.

1. Calculate block 1 and 2 to get the overcut check reference vector V1.
2. Calculate block N-1 and N to get the overcut check reference vector V2.
3. Connect V1 and V2 to form vector Vg.
4. The vector formed from block 1 end position to block N start position is called
gap vector.
5. Compare Vg and gap vector, if the angle difference is greater than/equal to 90
degrees or less than/equal to 270 degrees, it will be seen as overcut. If overcut
does not occur, it will move to the next step. If overcut occurs, it will go to step
10.
6. Repeat step 2~5 on block N-2 and N-1.
7. Repeat step 2~5 on block N-3 and N-2.
8. ……………….
9. Repeat step 2~5 on block 3 and 4. If overcut does not occur, it will execute block

132 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

1 according to normal tool radius compensation. If overcut occurs, it will go to

the next step.
10. Suppose that the overcut blocks are N-1 and N, the system will do calculation
and overcut check on block 1, gap vector, and block N.

The following is the example of the compensation of the cutting path on whether the
overcut check is excecuted.

Example 1

Program:
G00 XY
D1
M97 P0001

G00 XY
D2
M97 P0001

M30

O0001
G41
G00 X10. Y10.
G01 X15. F1000
X17. Y0.
M08
M09
X18.
X20. Y10.
X25.
G40
G00 X30. Y0.
M99

1. D2=0.3

With overcut check Without overcut check

133 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2. D2=1.5

With overcut check Without overcut check

3. D2=3

With overcut check Without overcut check

Example 2

Program:
G00 XY-10.
D1
M97 P0001

G00 XY-10.
D2
M97 P0001
M30

O0001
G41
G00 Y0.
G01 X10.
X15. Y-10. F1000
X12. Y-15.
Y-20.
X17. Y-25.
X22. Y-20.
Y-15.
X19. Y-10.
X24. Y0.
X34.
G40
G00 Y-10.
M99

134 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

1. D2=1

With overcut check Without overcut check

2. D2=2

With overcut check Without overcut check

3. D2=4

With overcut check Without overcut check

4. D2=8

With overcut check Without overcut check

135 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.5.17.3 Password

In safety level 1, the "Set Password" dialog box (as shown in the figure below) is opened
from "User Management→Password". At this time, the safety level 1 password will be
displayed in the dialog box, where you can change the password. (The default
password is blank. For the first time, please input the password you want to set and
press ENTER to save)

"Set Password" Dialogue Box

2.5.17.4 Management

In safety level 1, the "Management" dialog box (as shown in the figure below) is
opened by "User Management→Management". Use SPACE to switch whether the
item is selected and press ENTER to save the changes. The items checked here It will
be displayed in "Parameter" menu of safety level 0, please refer to Safety Level for
details.

Note: The default selection of the controller is all selected, so when the safety level
is 0 after the controller is turned on for the first time, all the items are visible
from the menu of "F2→Parameter".

136 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"Management" Dialog Box (Safety Level 1, Take INCON-M470/M670 for Example)

2.5.17.5 Show Event Record

"Event Record" shows the CNC controller's error message and event log (as shown
below). A total of 8192 event records can be displayed in this dialog box. If the number
exceeds the number of records, the old record will be deleted in first in first out
sequence.

If you want to get the text of "Event Record", please select the save record in the lower
part of the dialog box, and then the "Save Event Record" screen will pop up. After
inputting the file name and pressing ENTER or confirm, the file will be saved in /MSYS
directory, this file is named .LST. Users can use FTP file transfer to download this text
file to the computer.

Note: This item is the same as "System Management→Show Event Record" in the
machine parameter menu. For details, refer to INCON-
M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) Integration Manual.

137 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"Event Record" Dialogue Box

2.5.17.6 Save User Parameter

This item opens the "Save User Parameter" dialog box. After the user enters the file
name and presses ENTER, the user parameters can be saved in /MUSER subdirectory.
Extend file name are .USR, .TOL, .MAC. After saving, the user can get the file through
FTP file transfer. If you insert the USB flash disk, you can choose to save it in the USB
flash disk, as shown below.

"Save User Parameter" Dialogue Box

2.5.17.7 Load User Parameter

This item opens the "Load User Parameter" dialog box. The user can select user
parameter in /MUSER subdirectory and load to system. Before to use this function,

138 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

need to transfer user parameter to /MUSER subdirectory by FTP first. If USB disk has in
system also can transfer it to USB disk.

"Load User Parameter" Dialogue Box

2.5.17.8 List User Parameter

User parameter archiving is stored in a special format, so the parameter content cannot
be opened on the general personal computer. This item opens the "List User
Parameter" dialog box. After the user enters the file name and presses the ENTER key
to confirm, the user parameters can be stored in the text file format in the /MUSER
subdirectory. The file name of this file is .ULS, and the Chinese code is Big5 code. To
print the contents of the user's parameter file, you must first transfer the file to your
computer using FTP file transfer, and then open and print it with text editing software
(such as Notepad).

"List User Parameter" Dialogue Box

139 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.5.17.9 Related Machine Data

The parameters listed in this dialog box are the machine-related parameter values that
the user can refer to. The dialog box shows the machine parameter values for the user
to view, can not be changed.

 Maximum Speed: The fastest moving speed per axis (mm/min).

 G00 Speed: G00 speed (mm/min) when the override rate is set to 100%.
 G00 0 Override Speed: The speed of G00 when the override rate is set to 0%.
(Applicable only for 4-segment override)
 Jog Speed: Jog speed under the condition that the override rate is 100% (Unit:
mm/min).
 Positive Limit/Negative Limit: Positive and negative limits of each axis's travel (in
the system's minimum unit of movement, example: μm).
 Maximum Feed Speed: The maximum acceptable cutting speed for this machine. If
the value of F_ given is greater than this value, the value is used as the cutting speed
(mm/min).
 Dry Run Speed: The feed speed (mm/min) used by this machine during "Run→Dry
Run".
 Maximum Spindle Speed: The maximum spindle speed (rpm).

At the bottom of this dialog box, there are two lines of time for the use of the machine
for reference. The first line shows the use case so far for this boot time, and the second
shows the cumulative usage from the factory date to date.

 Power up Time: Accumulative power-on time of the machine.

 Accumulated Run Time: Accumulative machining time since the machine power was
turned on.
 Duty: (Power up T/Accumulated Run Time) x 100%.
 System life Time: Accumulative power-on time of the controller.
 Accumulated Life Run Time: Accumulative machining time since the controller was
turned on.
 Duty: (System life/ Accumulated Life Run Time) x 100%.

140 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"Related Machine Data" Dialogue Box (M470)

"Related Machine Data" Dialogue Box (M670/M675)

2.5.18 User Defined Machine Data

If the machinery manufacturer has a predefined definition in the PLC, after entering the
pull-down menu from "F2→Parameter", the user can see the "User Defined Machine
Data" item, which allows the user to define the machine data.

When this item is selected, a "User Defined Machine Data" dialog box will appear,
which will be displayed in the PLC to define the machine data that the user can set. The
data varies with the machine and the PLC.

141 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"User Defined Machine Data" Dialogue Box

2.6 Help (F2→H)

"F2→Help" Pull-down Menu (Take INCON-M670 for Example)

The explain of auxiliary keys as following table were used in the help dialog box:
Key Function

↑, ↓ The guide of help contents.

PGUP/PGDN Turn pages (previous page/next page).

TAB/SHIFT+TAB Switch index items (down/up).

CTRL + F1 Return to the previous level.

ENTER Enter the content of the indexed item.

ESC Close the help instructions window.

Note: When using the CNC controller, press the F1 key at any time to display the
help dialog box of the current operation. To close the help dialog box, press
the ESC key.

142 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.6.1 Topic

Press "F2→Help→Topic", pop-up a help explain dialog box, and window is listing the
main items for help explain.

"Help→Topic" Dialog Box (Take INCON-M470 for Example)

2.6.2 Code Index

Press "F2→Help→Code Index", pop-up code index help dialog box and it is listing all
the instruction code index to facilitate inquiries.

"Help→Code Index" Dialog Box

143 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.6.3 Quick Guide

Press "F2→Help→Quick Guide", a dialog box appears. This is a quick guide to

beginners of INCON-M470/M670/M675, which guides beginners to use this CNC
controller in a step-by-step manner with an exercise program for beginners to practice
executing or editing.

"Help→Quick Guide" Dialog Box (Take INCON-M470 for Example)

2.6.4 How to Use Help

Press "F2→Help→How to Use Help", that is, there is a dialog box that shows how to
use the help and explain auxiliary key functions of dialog box.

"How to Use Help" Dialogue Box

144 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.6.5 About INCON-M470/INCON-M670/INCON-M675

From "F2→Help→About INCON-M470/INCON-M670/INCON-M675", a dialog box

will appear showing the software version, product serial number, optional function
code and other information of this controller.

"About INCON-M470" Dialogue Box (Take INCON-M470 for Example)

Note: After completing the business formalities, the user can obtain the required
optional functions (for details of optional functions, refer to INCON-
M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) Integration Manual). INCON-
M470/M670/M675 has three optional functions, as shown in the following
table:
Item Code Function

Advanced high-speed high-precision function (high-speed high-precision

1 1（2⁰）
control program)
2
2 4（2 ） Absolute position record

If multiple optional functions are enabled at the same time, the function codes
are as follows: 1, 4, 1+4→5.

145 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.6.6 About Machine

From "F2→Help→About Machine", a dialog box will appear, showing the basic
information of this machine, such as the information of machinery factory ... etc., the
information shown here is set by the machinery factory. If not set, the screen as shown
below:

"About Machine" Dialogue Box

Note: Refer to INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) Integration Manual for how to

set the display message in the dialog box.

2.6.7 Authorisation Instruction

 Optional function authorization

If you have the optional matching function, after completing the business formalities,
we will generate a serial number and authorization code according to the matching
function. After the validity period of the authorization code generated by the customer
within 3 days, "F2→Help→Authorisation Instruction" dialog box, enter the
authorization code, you can open the optional features.

146 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"Authorisation Instruction" Dialogue Box

 INCON-M470S/M670S/M675S Authorization

INCON-M470S, INCON-M670S, INCON-M675S of authorization start: After

completing the service procedure, INTEK produces a set of serial numbers and start
codes, after the customer needs to start generating code validity 14 days,
"F2→Help→Authorisation Instruction" dialog box, enter the start code.

2.7 Safety Level

INCON-M470/M670/M675 safety level has four levels, respectively, 3, 2, 1, 0, the

current status of the safety level is displayed in the controller screen state display area,
as shown below. When the safety level is 0, the screen will not display any number.

Current Authorization Level (Take INCON-M470 for Example)

147 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Note: INCON-M470, INCON-M670, INCON-M675 operates exactly the same in the

authorization level mechanism, the following illustration to INCON-M470
screen, for example.

2.7.1 Safety Level 3

Press CTRL + F7 will pop up the "Check Password" dialog box (as shown below), enter
the safety level 3 password login safety level 3 and a pop-up menu appears, showing
the complete machine parameter menu (such as in the same dialog box input safety
level 2 password, that is login safety level 2).

"Check Password" Dialogue Box of Authorization Level 2 and 3

To logout from safety level 3 and reset to zero safety level, select the last "Log Out" (as
shown below).

148 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Safety Level 3 Machine Parameter Menu (Take INCON-M670 for Example)

From the machine parameter menu, "System Management→Password" to open the

"Set Password" dialog box of safety level 2 and 3, the safety level 2 and 3 password will
be displayed in the dialog box, as shown below. Please enter the password you want to
change and press ENTER to save.

"Set Password" Dialogue Box of Authorization Level 2 and 3

Note: After setting a new password and pressing ENTER, the "Check Password"
screen will pop up again. Enter your new password (safety level 2 or 3).

From the machine parameters menu, "System Management→Management" to open

the "Management" dialog box to SPACE switch whether to select this item, and press
ENTER to save the changes, as shown below. The items selected here will be displayed
in the safety level 2 machine parameter menu.

149 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"Management" Dialogue Box of Authorization Level 3

Note: The default state of the CNC controller is all selected, so after the CNC
controller is turned on for the first time and the safety level is 2, the complete
machine parameter menu can be seen when the machine parameter menu is
opened by CTRL+F7.

2.7.2 Safety Level 2

Press CTRL+F7 will pop up "Check Password" dialog box, enter the safety level 2
password to enter safety level 2. The menu will display the selected machine parameter
from "System Management→Management" of the machine parameter menu of
safety level 3, as shown below. To logout from safety level 2 and reset to zero safety
level, select the last "Log Out" item.

150 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Safety Level 2 of the "Machine Parameter" Menu (Take INCON-M670 for Example)

In safety level 2, the password of safety level 2 can be modified from the machine
parameter menu "System Management→Password". After setting, press ENTER to
save, as shown in the following figure.

Safety Level 2 "Set Password" Dialog Box

151 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Note: After setting a new password and pressing ENTER, the "Check Password"
dialog box will pop up again. Enter your new password (safety level 2 or 3).

2.7.3 Safety Level 1

Select "Advanced Mode" press "F2→Parameter" to exit the "Check Password" dialog
box (as shown below). In this case, you need to enter the safety level 1 password to
enter safety level 1 (for the first login, the default password is blank, Please press ENTER
to enter).

"F2→Parameter" Pull-down Menu (Take INCON-M470 for Example)

152 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"Check Password" Dialog Box of Authorization Level 1 (Take INCON-M470 for Example)

After logging in safety level 1, press the "F2→Parameter", you can see the complete
parameter menu, as shown below. To exit from Safety Level 1 to Safety Level 0, select
"Easy Mode" at the bottom of the "Parameter" menu to go back to Safety Level 0.

Safety Level 1 "F2→Parameter" Pull-down Menu (Take INCON-M470 for Example)

In safety level 1, the "Set Password" dialog box is opened by "System

Management→Password" (as shown below). At this time, the safety level 1 password
will be displayed in the dialog box, where you can change the password (the default
password is blank, the first time set please enter the password you want to set and

153 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

press ENTER to save).

Safety Level 1 "Set Password" Dialog Box (Take INCON-M470 for Example)

From "System Management→Management" to open the "Management" dialog box,

as shown below. Use SPACE to toggle whether this item is checked and press ENTER
to save the changes. The items checked there will be displayed in the "Parameter"
menu of safety level 0.

Safety Level 1 "System Management→Management" Dialog Box

Note: The controller defaults to all selected, so when the controller is turned on for
the first time and the safety level is 0, all the options are visible from the

154 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

"F2→Parameter" menu.

2.7.4 Safety Level 0

When the user's safety level is 0, "F2→Parameter" will display the options that can be
displayed in the "User Management→Management" menu in safety level 1, as shown
below.

"Parameter" Pull-down Menu of Authorization Level 0

155 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2.8 USB Function

General CNC programs are stored in the controller built-in solid state flash memory,
the use of FTP protocol to transfer external CNC programs to the CNC controller for
execution. If the built-in storage capacity of the controller is insufficient, the user can
also use the USB storage device to expand the program storage space.

Most CNC controller is installed in electrical control box, user should not plug in and
pull out USB flash memory disk frequently, to ensure the stability of USB flash memory
disk as an extension of the memory, it is recommended to have USB flash memory disk
place upon a USB slot. User can use FTP transmitting method, to transmit external CNC
program to the USB, then executing the program.

 USB storage device use note:

1. USB flash memory disk must be in FAT32 format, first input the USB into the
computer, after the computer screen show the device can be used, do the
following:
(1) Within the picture of USB flash memory disk press the right key, click
「format」.
(2) Open「format unload disk」dialog box, select file system「FAT32」.
2. The USB slot has limited power supply ( 0.15 A) and some USB devices require
extra power to operate.
3. The file name must use ".CNC" as the program name extension, and the program
name can not exceed 8 English letters. The program name can be composed of
English letters, numbers and -, _, etc. For example: TEST_123.CNC is the available.
4. The CNC controller has two USB slots, but only the USB storage for one of the slots.

156 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

USB Ports

5. When using FTP to transfer program to USB, user name and password of this level
should be input according to safety level 1~3 as shown in the following table:
USB transmitted file Account name Password

Safety level 1 USB User password

Safety level 2 USB-SYSTEM System password

Safety level 3 USB-ADMIN ADMIN password

When using USB account for FTP profile, USB connection can not be connected if the
USB storage device does not exist. Do not remove the USB storage device in the FTP
connection, otherwise it will cause program transfer error.

157 / 353
INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

158 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3 Programming Codes

3.1 Definition of Programs and Blocks

A typical CNC program of INCON-M470/M670/M675 is combined by G, M, S, T code

and number. Each line of program called a block, the block is assemble by each item,
the item called address (Character) and number (Arabic numbers).

Nxxxx : Block number

Gxx : Preparatory functions
Xxxx.x : Address/number
Yxxx.x : Address/number
Zxxx.x : Address/number
Fxxx.x : Feed rate
Mxx : Auxiliary functions
Sxxxx : Spindle speed
Txx : Tool number

Number of address on table can using integer or real number. Generally CNC program
number definition is real number, when user keys in integer and CNC will turn to real
number by least unit of system (0.001 mm, 0.0001 inch).for example: user key in
"X12000", will turn to 12000 x 0.001 mm =12 mm. so in the program 12 mm can key as
"X12." or "X12000". In the program for 12 mm, user can key in 12. or 12000 for saving
memory purpose 12. is recommend. But "X12" will be 0.012 mm, and 1000 times
different, and the different makes damage of machine, so must very carefully when key
in.

Note: Within the CNC controller also has "Parameter→Attribute" Decimal Point
don't exist option is provided for users not accustomed to the above wording,
namely, to convert "X1234" or "X1234.", "X1234.000" is the input value,
please refer to Attribute for details.

159 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.2 G Codes

3.2.1 G code table Symbol Description

The following lists the symbols and descriptions associated with the G-Code:

Symbol Explain

* The specified G code for this group when power on.

# You can set the G code power-on preset value of this group by parameters.

The most recently used G code for this group is still retained at shutdown and is used as
^
the G code setting for the next power-on.

The value set in this G code is reserved until the program is finished or before it is reset,
&
and needs to be set again after each power-on.

This command is valid until the corresponding cancel command is set or another
%
command is set.
； For note, and can add note behind the mark.
( Same as above.
’ Same as above.
/ Mark this block so it can be ignore.
N1、N10 Block number, used as indicators, it is not necessary to add this indicator for every line.

3.2.2 G codes for Status Change

G code Format Function

Cartesian coordinate programming (cancel

*G15 G15
G16)
G16 G16 Program with polar coordinates
*G17 G17 Select the XY plane
G18 G18 Select the ZX plane
G19 G19 Select the YZ plane
^G20 G20 Inch unit input
^G21 G21 Metric unit input 入

160 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G code Format Function

Tool radius compensation canceled (Cancel

*G40 G40
G41/G42)
&G41 G41 Tool offset left offset compensation
&G42 G42 Tool offset right compensation
G43 G43 Tool length compensation

Tool length compensation canceled (cancel

*G49 G49
G43)

Mirror and scale up or down cancel (cancel

*G50 G50
G51)
&G51 G51 X_Y_Z_I_J_K_ or G51 X_Y_Z_P_ Mirror and scale up or down
*G54 G54 Select #1 working coordinate system
G54.1 P001~P128 Select extra G54 coordinate offset
G55 G55 Select #2 Work Coordinate System
G56 G56 Select #3 Work Coordinate System
G57 G57 Select #4 Work Coordinate System
G58 G58 Select #5 Work Coordinate System
G59 G59 Select #6 Work Coordinate System

Accurate in-position mode cancel (cancel

#G60 G60
G60)
#G61 G61 Accurate in position mode
G68 G68 X_Y_Z_R Coordinate rotation
*G69 G69 Coordinate rotation cancel (cancel G68)
*G90 G90 Absolute programming
G91 G91 Incremental programming

G93 G93 Inverse time mode

*G94 G94 Feed rate in millimeters (inches) per minute

Feed rate in millimeters (inches) per

G95 G95
revolution
G96 G96 Constant surface speed is on

Constant surface speed control cancellation

*G97 G97
(cancel G96)

Can cycle instruction to return to the original

G98 G98
starting height

Can cycle command returns the reference

*G99 G99
height R point

161 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Group:

Group G code

2 *G17、G18、G19

3 *G90、G91

5 G93、*G94、G95

6 ^G20、^G21

7 *G40、&G41、&G42

8 G43、*G49

10 G98、*G99

11 *G50、&G51

13 G96、*G97

12 *G54、G55、G56、G57、G58、G59、G54.1 Pxx

15 #G60、#G61

16 G68、*G69

17 *G15、G16

19 G168、*G169

20 G178、*G179

3.2.3 G codes for Axial Motion

G code Format Function

*%G00 G00 X_Y_Z_A_ Four-axis positioning (fast moving)

G00 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_ Six-axis positioning (fast movement)

*%G01 G01 X_Y_Z_A_ Four-axis linear interpolation

Six-axis linear interpolation (M670 any

G01 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_
four-axis linear interpolation)

Two-axis linear interpolation with

G01 X_Y_R_
rounded corners

Two-axis linear interpolation with

G01 X_Y_L_
chamfer

162 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G code Format Function

%G02 Three methods: Radius, Centre, angle G02 Clockwise circular interpolation

G03 counterclockwise circular

%G03
interpolation
G17 G02(G03) X_Y_R_F_
G18 G02(G03) X_Z_R_F_ Give the radius format
G19 G02(G03) Y_Z_R_F_
G17 G02(G03) X_Y_I_J_F_
G18 G02(G03) X_Z_I_K_F_ Give the center of the circle format
G19 G02(G03) Y_Z_J_K_F_
G17 G02(G03) I_J_A_F_
G18 G02(G03) I_K_A_F_ Give angle format
G19 G02(G03) J_K_A_F_
By specifying the halfway point to the
G28 G28 X_Y_Z_A_
first reference point

G28 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_ Same as G28

Through the designated halfway point

G29 G29 X_Y_Z_A_
to reach the destination

G29 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_ Same as G29

Point to the second, third and fourth

G30 G30 X_Y_Z_A_P_ reference points by specifying the
waypoint

G30 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_P_ Same as G30

Conditional termination of linear

G31 G31 X_Y_Z_A_F_
interpolation instructions

G31 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_F_ Same as G31

G33 X_F_
G33 Y_F_
G33 Z_F_
G33
G33 X_Y_F_ Thread function
G33 X_Z_F_
G33 Y_Z_F_
Fast positioning with machine
G53 G53 X_Y_Z_A_
coordinates

G53 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_ Same as G53

G70.00(G02/G03)
G70.00
P_X_Y_Z_U_V_W_C_J_K_Q_(R_/L_)D_I_E_ Rectangle pocket machining
G70.01(G02/G03)
G70.01
P_X_Y_Z_R_(U_V_W_)C_J_K_Q_I_E_F_ Round pocket machining
G70.02(G02/G03)
G70.02
P_X_Y_Z_U_V_W_A_B_C_J_K_Q_(R_/L_)D_ Rectangle dowel machining
G70.03(G02/G03)
G70.03
P_X_Y_Z_R_(U_V_W_)C_J_K_Q_I_E_F_ Circular dowel machining

163 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G code Format Function

G70.04(G02/G03)
G70.04
I_P_X_Y_Z_U_V_W_(R_/L_)D_F_ Rectangle side surfacing
G70.05(G02/G03)
G70.05
I_P_X_Y_Z_R_(U_V_W_)F_ Round side surfacing
G70.06
G70.06
D_X_Y_Z_U_V_W_C_I_F_ Surface machining
G70.07
G70.07
G_X_Y_Z_R_I_J_L_Q_P_F_ Linear drilling pattern
G70.08 C_G_X_Y_Z_R_I_J_
G70.08
A_B_U_V_W_D_Q_P_F_ Grid drilling pattern
G70.09 G_X_Y_Z_R_C_A_I_
G70.09
L_B_Q_P_F_ Arc drilling pattern

G70.11(G41/G42) Contour pocket side surfacing

G70.11
P_X_Y_Z_(U_V_W_)C_R_I_F_ machining
G70.21 G70.21 I_J_L_ Linear object pattern
G70.22 G70.22 C_I_J_A_B_D_ Grid object pattern
G70.23 G70.23 X_Y_Z_R_A_I_L_ Arc object pattern

The fourth axis fixed tilt angle does not

*G71.00 G71.00;
follow
&G71.01 G71.01 A_E_R_ Fourth axis fixed tilt angle to follow
G73 G73 X_Y_Z_R_Q_K_F_ Drilling cycle (rapid peck drilling)
G74 G74 X_Y_Z_R_P_K_F_ Tapping can cycle (left-hand tapping)
G76 G76 X_Y_Z_R_Q_P_K_F_ Boring can cycle (precision boring)

Cancel drilling, tapping or boring cycle

*G80 G80
instructions

Drilling Boring can cycle (usually

G81 G81 X_Y_Z_R_K_F_
drilling boring hole)
G82 G82 X_Y_Z_R_P_K_F_ Boring drilling cycle (precision depth)

Drilling can cycle (peck drilling with

G83 G83 X_Y_Z_R_Q_K_F_ or
G83 X_Y_Z_R_I_J_K_L_F_ chip breaking)
G84 G84 X_Y_Z_R_P_K_F_ Tapping can cycle (right hand tapping)
G85 G85 X_Y_Z_R_K_F_ Boring can cycle (general boring)
G86 G86 X_Y_Z_R_K_F_ Boring can cycle (general boring)

Boring can cycle (precision inverse

G87 G87 X_Y_Z_R_Q_P_K_F_
boring)

Boring can cycle (precision depth stop

G88 G88 X_Y_Z_R_P_K_F_
hand back)
G89 G89 X_Y_Z_R_P_K_F_ Boring can cycle (precision depth)

164 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Group:

Group G code

1 *%G00、*%G01、%G02、%G03、G31

9 G73、G74、G76、*G80、G81~G89

18 G10、G10.xx、G11、G11.xx

0 G28、G29、G53、G30、G33、G37、G70.xx、G71.xx

3.2.4 Other G codes

G code Format Function

G04 G04 P_ or G04 X_ time dwell

G09 G09 .... Single block precise positioning
G10 G10 Open data settings/data settings

Set the tool length compensation value and

G10 (I0) P_L_R_
tool radius compensation value
G10 I1 X_ Pp1 Pp2
Pp1 Pp2 Set the pitch compensation value

G10 I2 Xx Yy Zz Aa Bb Cc Set additional offset

G10.01 Select the second spindle (sub spindle)

G10.02_ Start the following axis

G10.03_ Coordinate system mapping

G10.04 Mechanical offset

*G10.07 Turn on the rotary axis shortest path mode

High speed and high precision parameter

G10.10 P_
selection

G10.20

Set Macro to tool length compensation and

G10.37 Pp(Macro) Qq(Macro)
tool length wear

Set the Macro to tool radius compensation

G10.38 Pp(Macro) Qq(Macro)
and tool radius wear

The G54~G59 coordinate offset is set by the

G10.54～G10.59 Qq
Macro variable

165 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G code Format Function

Assume that the value of the Macro variable

in group p is n. Then this command will set
G10.54 Qq(Macro) Pp(Macro) six consecutive variables starting from Macro
group q to the G54 extra coordinate offset of
G54.1
G10.60 Macro smooth mode
G10.65 Switch to macro mode B
G10.66 Start a very small line segment connection
G11 G11 Close data setting/data acquisition

Get tool length compensation and tool

radius compensation data (the CNC
G11 I0 Pn Pm
controller must have the Macro function to
use)

Get extra offset (CNC controller must have

G11 I2 Pn
Macro function to use)

G11.01 Select the first spindle

G11.02_ Close the following axis

G11.03_ Close coordinate mapping

G11.04 Off mechanical offset

G11.07 Turn off the rotary axis shortest path mode

Do not choose high speed and high

G11.10
precision parameters

G11.20

Remove tool length compensation and tool

G11.37 Pp(Macro) Qq(Macro)
length wear to Macro

Remove tool radius compensation and tool

G11.38 Pp(Macro) Qq(Macro)
radius wear to Macro

Remove the G54~G59 coordinate offset to

G11.54~G11.59 Qq
the Macro variable
G11.60 Macro smooth mode cancellation
G11.65 Switch to macro mode A
G11.66 Turn off very small line segment connection
G37 G37 Z_Q_D_F_E Automatic tool measurement
G52 G52 X_Y_Z_A_ Sub-coordinate system set
G92 G92 X_Y_Z_A_ Program origin setting

166 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G code Format Function

G92 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_ Same as above

G92 Program origin position setting

G65 G65 Pp Qq [Aa][Bb][Cc]……[Yy][Zz] Call macro subroutine

3.2.5 G code supplement

1. In the INCON-M470 format X_Y_Z_A_, A represents the 4th axis, and you can also
use B, C, U, V, W to represent the 4th axis in the "parameter→fourth axis"
selection. In the INCON-M670/M675 format X_Y_Z_A_B_C_, A represent fourth
axis, B represent fifth axis and C represent sixth axis, INCON-M670 can also use U,
V, W to represent the 4th, 5th, 6th axis in the "parameter→fourth axis"
selection.(please refer to 4th Axis )
2. G codes are not marked with a special symbol of the script are all single-effective
command G code (one shot G-code), means that the G code is valid only in the
specified line, all of these G code is Being classified as group 00, its mode is valid
until the replacement of other G codes in the same group occurs.
3. If the program is stopped during emergency stop or when F10 is pressed, the tool
compensation will be automatically canceled (ie, the specified G code will be
restored automatically when the group is turned on).
For example:
The specified G code at power on is G40 (tool radius compensation
Group 07 G40/G41/G42
canceled).

The specified G code at power on is G50 (mirror and scale in or

Group 11 G50/G51
out).

The specified G code at power on is G69 (coordinate rotation

Group 16 G68/G69
cancel).

The specified G code at power on is G15 (remove the polar

Group 17 G15/G16
coordinate to the rectangular coordinate program).

If the normal execution of the program ends and G codes are not given to each of
the above groups in the program, the above groups will also automatically restore
their boot-assigned G codes.
4. The G code of any of three different status groups can exist in the same line in the
CNC program at the same time, for example, G18, G91 and G16 (these are all G

167 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

codes with changing states).

5. The axially moving G code can only exist in the same stroke type, but it can exist
on the same line as the two state change G codes, but the state change G code
must precede the axially moving G code.
For example: G54 G90 G01 X600. Y400
(G54, G90 are status change G codes; G01 is axial movement G code)
6. G codes G04, G52 and G92 of one shot commands can only appear in one line
separately. Any other G code can not be displayed in the same line.
7. G09 must be valid with the axial movement G code in one line program.
For example: G09 G01 X500. Y450.

3.3 M Codes

Note: Please contact the machine factory for the actual M code.

3.3.1 M code table Symbol Description

The following lists the symbols and descriptions related to the M code table：

Symbol Explain

* Set by PLC, this is the specified M code in this group at power-on.

The role of rigid tapping M code set by the mechanical parameters, tentatively
# scheduled for M29, the actual M code, please contact the original pick-up machine
factory.

3.3.2 M code that controls program execution

M Code Format Function

M00 M00 System stop

168 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

M Code Format Function

M01 M01 Optional program termination

M02 M02 The program ends and the cursor stops at the end of the program

The program ends but the cursor points back to the first line of the
M30 M30
program

Section program loop (from the first P_ to the second P_, execution
M95 M95 P_P_L
L_ times)

M97 M97 P_L_ Intercom call L_ times

M98 M98(filename)L_ External subprogram call L_ times

The end of the subprogram (by the program to return to the

M99 M99
original call)

Program stop, and can be changed to manual operation along the

M100 M100
cutting path forward or backward feed

Optional program aborted, and can be changed to manual

M101 M101
operation along the cutting path forward or backward feed

3.3.3 Spindle, tool change and other controlled M code

M Code Format Function

M03 M03 S_ The spindle rotates clockwise in accordance with S_ rpm (rpm)

M04 M04 S_ The spindle rotates counterclockwise at S_ speed (rpm)

*M05 M05 Spindle stop

M06 M06 T_ Change the T value or change to T value refers to the tool

M08 M08 Cooling or vacuum start

*M09 M09 Cool or vacuum closed

#M29 M29 Rigid tapping effect

3.3.4 Additional Instructions for M Codes

1. The M code that controls the execution of the program can only appear in one

169 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

line separately. Any other M code or G code can not appear in the same line.
2. The presence or absence of M06/M08/M09 and its application function are set by
the PLC when the machine factory picks up the machine.
3. In a program can only have a spindle, tool change and other control of the M code,
but can co-exist with the G code.

3.4 Position and Feed Commands

3.4.1 G00/G53: Rapid Traverse/Rapid Traverse in Machine

Coordinate System

Format:
G00 X_Y_Z_A_ (M470)
G00 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_ (M670/M675)
G53 X_Y_Z_A_ (M470)
G53 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_ (M670/M675)

G00 initiates rapid traverse of tool to move from current program position to a
specified program position X_Y_Z_A_ (M670/M675：X_Y_Z_A_B_C_). The traverse
speed is the value of G00 speed in "X/Y/Z/C Axis" dialog box on the Machine
Parameter pop-up menu multiplied by G00 Feed Override % on machine panel. G00 is
a modal G code and remains effective until replaced by other motion G codes such as
G01, G02, or G03. G00 can be 1-axis, 2-axis, or 3-axis simultaneous motion; it is set in
"Motion and Speed" dialog box on the Machine Parameter pop-up menu. For further
information, please contact the machine maker.

G53 has the same function as G00. The difference between G00 and G53 is that G53
initiates rapid traverse of tool to move from current machine position to a specified
machine position, and it has to be programmed in G90 mode (absolute positions).

170 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G00 2-axis Positioning

G00 3-axis Positioning

Note: Under the circumstance of 2-axis positioning, G00/G53 command are

irrelevant to G17/G18/G19 plane selection.

3.4.2 G01: Linear Interpolation

Linear Interpolation

Format:
 G01 X_Y_Z_A_F_ (M470)
 M670 Six axis any four axis, for example:
G01 X_Y_Z_A_F_
G01 X_Y_Z_B_F_
G01 X_Y_Z_C_F_
G01 X_Z_A_B_F_
 G01 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_F_ (M670/M675)

When the outline of the workpiece is a straight line, it is cut by the G01 command. M675
can move in the simultaneous axis (also can move in 5, 4, 2, 1 axis), M670 can move in
any direction with 4 axes (also can be 3, 2, 1 axis with the simultaneous), M470 can be
four-axis with the simultaneous (also 3,2,1 axis with the simultaneous), while the F_

171 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

value designated cutting feed rate, the speed can be feed rate override adjustment
percentage Adjust it. Feed rate override adjustment is operated by the machine panel
rotary switch.

The unit of F_ differs as defined by G94 (mm/min) or G95 (mm/rev). F_ is the continuous
effective instruction, so the next single section cutting rate can be omitted when
omitted. For example: F0.1 S3000 feedrate in G95 mode: 0.1 (mm/rev) x 3000 (rev/min)
= 300 (mm/min)

G01 2-axis Linear Interpolation

G01 3-axis Linear Interpolation

When the feed rate setting exceeds 60000 mm/min, it need to be set from "Machine
Parameters→Motion and Speed→Max Feed Speed". For example: If feed rate setting
is 120000 mm/min, the Max Feed Speed needs to be set to 61200
(120000/100=60000=61200).

Note 1: The Max Feed Speed is limited to 60000 mm/min when Fine Speed is active.
Note 2: That G01 is not related to the plane selection such as G17/G18/G19 for any
two-axis linear interpolation. However, if the chamfering or rounding is
required, the axis to be moved must be defined by G17/G18/G19 If the plane
is the same, G17 must be G01 X_Y_L_F_ or G01 X_Y_R_F_, not G01 X_Z_F_.

Linear Interpolation with Chamfered or Rounded Angle

172 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Format:
G01 X_Y_L_F_
G01 X_Y_R_F_

Chamfering or rounding can only be performed in a specific plane, and both the
chamfering or rounding of the line and the next line must be a linear interpolation
command before chamfering or rounding is performed.

Chamfer is at a distance from the intersection of two straight lines L_ value of the
distance, automatically add a chamfering instructions, so that the workpiece is not too
chamfered angle. At the intersection of the two straight lines, the rounding
automatically adds an arc command with a radius of R_, tangent to the arc with the two
straight lines so that the chamfer of the original workpiece becomes a rounding.

Corner Rounding and Chamfering

Note 1: The chamfer's L_ value or the R_ value of the rounding must be an

appropriate size, which is not executable if the two values are too large.
Note 2: The linear interpolation of round and chamfer is related to the plane
selection. Only X_Y_L_ (R_) can be executed under G17. Only Y_Z_L_ (R_)
can be executed under G19 and only X_Z_L_ (R_) can be executed under
G18.

3.4.3 G31/G31.1: Conditional Linear Interpolation

Format:
 G31 X_Y_Z_A_F_ (M470 Specifies the program Position)
M670 Six axis any four axis, for example：

173 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G31 X_Y_Z_A_F_ or G31 X_Z_A_B_F_

 G31 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_F_ (M670/M675 Specifies the program position)
 G31.1 X_Y_Z_A_F_ (M470 Specify the mechanical position)
M670 Six axis any four axis, for example：
G31.1 X_Z_A_B_F_ or G31.1 X_Y_A_B_F_
 G31.1 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_F_ (M670/M675 Specify the mechanical position)

G31 command is the same as G01 linear interpolation command, linear interpolation
feed to the set destination with the cutting speed set by F_. The speed can be adjusted
by the feedrate override adjustment percentage. Specified as the program position in
G31 and the mechanical position in G31.1.

When there is a signal input from one of the external input points specified by the PLC
(ie when the input select ignore signal is changed from 0 to 1), the instruction ignores
all remaining strokes and stops immediately.

For example: G31 X100. Y100. Z100. A100. F100.Move the machine with 100
mm/mm to (100.,100.,100.,100.), if the machine is moved to
(X80.,Y80.,Z80.,A80.), the command will terminate at (X80., Y80., Z80., A80.),
when a signal input is detected by the PLC-specified external input.

Note 1: G31.1 command is only available for INCON-M470/M670 from system

version 5.09B or higher.
Note 2: The software limit will not be checked in advance in G31/G31.1 move mode.

3.4.4 G02/G03: CW/CCW Circular Interpolation

3.4.4.1 Definition of G02/G03

G02: Clockwise (CW) Arc cutting

G03: Counter clockwise (CCW) Arc cutting

174 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

The arc outline on the workpiece is cut by G02 or G03 command. Milling machine
workpiece is three-dimensional, so in different planes of its arc cutting direction as
shown below. The definition of the way: the line of sight toward the positive direction
of the plane vertical axis to the negative direction, clockwise G02, counterclockwise G03.
The path of arc interpolation varies with the selection plane, so G17/G18/G19 must be
given before the single-block program.

Circular Directions and Plane Selection

1. Paths on the plane G02/G03 X_Y_, X_Z_, Y_Z_

G02/G03 Path on Different Planes

2. G02/G03 X_Y_Z_P_ Helical interpolation path in space

G02/G03 Path in Different Dimensions

3.4.4.2 Format of G02/G03

175 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

format 2D (Arc or circle) 3D (Helical)

G17 G02(G03) X_Y_R_F_; G17 G02(G03) X_Y_R_Z_F_;
Radius format G18 G02(G03) X_Z_R_F_; G18 G02(G03) X_Z_R_Y_F_;
G19 G02(G03) Y_Z_R_F_; G19 G02(G03) Y_Z_R_X_F_;
Circle Center G17 G02(G03) X_Y_I_J_F_; G17 G02(G03) X_Y_I_J_Z_F_;
G18 G02(G03) X_Z_I_K_F_; G18 G02(G03) X_Z_I_K_Y_F_;
format G19 G02(G03) Y_Z_J_K_F_; G19 G02(G03) Y_Z_J_K_X_F_;

G17 G02(G03) I_J_A_F_; G17 G02(G03) I_J_A_Z_F_;

Angle format G18 G02(G03) I_K_A_F_; G18 G02(G03) I_K_A_Y_F_;
G19 G02(G03) J_K_A_F_; G19 G02(G03) J_K_A_X_F_;

Adding the Z_ and P_ values to the G02/G03 command line specifies the number of
helical to perform helical interpolation.

format 3D (Helical)

G17 G02(G03)X_Y_R_Z_P_F_;
Radius format G18 G02(G03)X_Z_R_Y_P_F_;
G19 G02(G03)Y_Z_R_X_P_F_;
Circle Center G17 G02(G03)X_Y_I_J_Z_P_F_;
G18 G02(G03)X_Z_I_K_Y_P_F_;
format G19 G02(G03)Y_Z_J_K_X_P_F_;
G17 G02(G03)I_J_A_Z_P_F_;
Angle format G18 G02(G03)I_K_A_Y_P_F_;
G19 G02(G03)J_K_A_X_P_F_;

1. Radius Format

Normal state: In the circular interpolation instruction, if any R_ value appears, it will be
treated as if it is preferred. In the instruction, X_Y_Z_ refers to the destination, and R_
refers to the radius. When R_ is negative, the arc will be greater than 180 degrees.

Format: G02 (G03)X_Z_R_

G02/G03 Radius Format: Normal Tool Path

176 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

If d > 2R: If the value of R_ is less than half of the travel to the destination, a semicircle
with R_ radius will be taken first, and then it will go straight to the destination. However,
this circular instruction mode still remains valid.

Format: G18 G02 (G03)X_Y_R_

G02/G03 Radius Format: Tool path when d>2R

If R = 0: If only X_Y_Z_ is given and R = 0, it will go straight to the destination. If only

G02/G03 is given and there is no X_Y_Z_ or R_ value afterwards, no action will be
performed.

G02/G03 Radius format：G02 (G03)X_Y_Z_R0 or X_Y_Z_

2. Center Format

Normal state: In the instruction, X_Y_, X_Z_, and Y_Z_ refer to the destination, and
I_J_, I_K_, and J_K_ indicate the distance of the center of the circle relative to the
starting point in each axial direction. If I_J_, I_K_, and J_K_ are the actual arcs of the
circle, the given destinations X_Y_, X_Z_, and Y_Z_ do not necessarily fall on the arc
very accurately. In order to make the destination X_Y_, X_Z_, Y_Z_ fall on the arc, the
center and radius of the arc will be recalculated. The new radius R′ is the average of the
distance from the original center to the starting point and the end point, and then
automatically changed. Circular interpolation for "radius format". As shown below, "e"
is the distance between the target location and the center of the circle. (A) is normal.

177 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

(B) is when e > R. (C) is when e < R.

Tool Path of G02/G03 in Center Format (General)

If the destinations X_Y_, X_Z_, and Y_Z_ are not given, a full circle will be made with
I_J_, I_K_, and J_K_ as the center. If the start point and end point in the G02/G03
instruction are the same, execute a full circle.

G02/G03 Center format: G02 (G03)I_J_

If X_Y_, X_Z_, Y_Z_ have given and I_J_, I_K_, J_K_ have zero values, they will
go straight to the destination.

G02/G03 Center format: G02)(G03)X_Y_I_J_, X_Z_I_K_, Y_Z_J_K_ or G02 (G03)X_Y_, X_Z_, Y_Z_

3. Angle format

Normal state：When given A_ value, give center, A_ value as angle. This angle can be
absolute or relative incremental.

Format: (A) G90 G02 (G03)I_J_A_, (B) G91 G02 (G03)I_J_A_

178 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Tool Path of G02/G03 in Angle Format (General)

In the absolute coordinate mode, if only the A_ value is zero, the following actions will
be performed.

G02/G03 angle format：In absolute coordinate mode, only A_ value is zero

In the absolute coordinate mode, if the center and angle values are zero, there will be
no action. In the relative increment mode, if the center value is zero or the angle value
is zero, there is no action.

3.4.4.3 Program Example of G02/G03

 Helical interpolation:
G17
G00 X0.Y0.Z0. ;Quickly locate the starting point（0,0）
G02 X-50.Y-50.I-50.Z-40. F2000. ;Perform spiral interpolation to the destination（-50,-50,-40）
M30

3D circle XY, XZ Composite map

Helical Interpolation

179 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

 Helical interpolation: Z and P7 are added to the G02 command line. The tool first
performs 7 full-circle paths and then goes to the destination (-50, -50, -40).
G17
G00 X0.Y0.Z0. ;Quickly locate the starting point（0,0）
G02 X-50.Y-50.I-50.Z-40. P7 F2000. ;After performing 7 full circle paths, go to the destination（-50,-50,-40）
M30

3D circle XY, XZ Composite map

Spiral helical interpolation

Note: INCON-M675 in G168 (RTCP on) mode, to use G02/G03 instruction, the
program coordinate values of A, B and C axes must be set to 0.

3.4.5 G33: Threading

Format:
G33 X_F_
G33 Y_F_
G33 Z_F_
G33 X_Y_F_
G33 X_Z_F_
G33 Y_Z_F_

G33 needs to be used simultaneously with G95. G95 sets the F_ value to the feed speed
per revolution. The tool cuts the surface of the workpiece in the direction of the X-axis,
Y-axis, Z-axis, or the fourth axis according to the speed at which the spindle moves by
F_ per revolution. When the G33 starts feeding in each axis, the feed is started only

180 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

when the spindle rotates to a certain fixed angle (preset zero angle). Therefore, the G33
can be used for thread or a screw.

G33 Threading

G33 X_Z_F_ (Taper Threading)

Note 1: The G95 command must be given before the G33 command, and the
machine spindle must have an Encoder to execute this command.
Note 2: The dashed line returns the non-G33 command feed range of the moving
part, which must be added by G00 command.
Note 3: G33 can also make large-aperture thread cutting instructions. Most small-
diameter internal threads are tapped with tapping instructions G74 and G84.
However, because of the high tool cost of large-aperture thread, the use of
an adjustable boring tool in conjunction with the G33 command can save
costs.

3.5 Tool Compensation Commands

3.5.1 G43/G49: Tool Length Compensation/Cancel Tool Length

Compensation

181 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Format:
G43 H_
G49

The tool used in the CNC milling machine is different in the length of each tool.
Therefore, the tool length must be corrected for each tool so that the machining depth
of each tool is correct. G43 can start the tool length compensation function. In the tool
table, H_ value refers to the positive and negative values in the tool length column, and
determines the positive and negative direction and length of the compensation. The
value in this column refers to the difference when compared with the standard tool
length. If the new tool is longer than the standard tool, this value is positive; if the new
tool is shorter than the standard tool, this value is negative.

G43 is a continuous valid command. If you want to cancel the tool length compensation
function, execute G49 or H00. (G49: Tool length compensation canceled. H00 indicates
that the compensate value is zero)

G43: Tool Length Compensation (Positive/Negative)

3.5.2 G37: Automatic Tool Length Measurement

Format:
G37 Z_Q_D_F_E_

The G37 command allows the spindle to perform automatic tool length measurement
in the axial direction in which it is mounted, and automatically replaces the tool length

182 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

correction value in the tool list with the measured value. The Z value in this command
refers to the mechanical absolute coordinate value at which the user wants the point
of the blade to be in the axial direction when the tool tip touches the sensor. The
expected mechanical position value and the actual mechanical position of the current
point the difference between the two values is the calculated value obtained from this
automatic measurement. The mathematical formula is as follows:

Expected mechanical position value (Z_) - Actual mechanical position value at this

point = Calculated value from automatic measurement

The general spindle is mounted on the Z axis. The Z value is the Z axis value; if the
spindle is mounted on the X or Y axis, this Z value is the value of the X or Y axis. If F_,
E_, Q_, D_ and other items in the command are not set, the four items of move down
speed, detecting speed, pull-up distance, and detection distance are preset in the
"parameter→tool length measurement" item replace it.

Before using this instruction, be sure to confirm the following:

1. The machine is equipped with a tool length probe.
2. The tool offset number (not H00) has been selected for the H_ command before
this command.
3. The measured tool has moved directly above the probe.

The steps for automatic measurement are as follows:

1. Approach the probe at the feed rate of F_ until the tool tip touches the probe. If
you do not touch the probe beyond the D_ distance, an alarm will be given and
the machine will stop.
2. Exit again at the speed of F_ to the distance from the probe Q_.
3. Approach the sensor again with E_ until the tip touches the probe again.
4. At this time, the controller will automatically calculate the axial position difference,
and then this difference replaces the tool length compensation value of the tool
compensation number in the original tool list.

183 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Note 1: The Z_ value must be set. The other values (F_, E_, Q_, D_) directly use the
value set in the "tool length measurement" parameter.
Note 2: The sign of the Q_ value is determined by the direction of movement of the
prober. Generally, if Q_ is positive, the tool moves downwards close to the
probe (negative direction of the Z axis); however, if Q_ is negative, the tool
tip is up side mounted so that the Z-axis positive direction is looking for a
probe.

G37: Automatic Tool Length Measurement

3.5.2.1 Two-stage Automatic Tool Length Measurement

If the Q_ value in the "tool length measurement" parameter is set to 0, two-stage

automatic tool length measurement function is activated.

Two-step automatic measurement steps are as follows:

1. Approach the probe first with a feed rate of F_ (at this time the scaler signal is 1)
until the tip touches the probe. If you do not touch the probe beyond the D_
distance, an alarm will be given and the machine will stop.
2. When the tool tip touches the probe, it will pull up at the speed of E_ until the
measuring tool signal changes to 0, then it will complete the tool length
measurement.
3. The controller will automatically calculate the axial position difference and then
use this difference to replace the tool length compensation value of the tool offset
number in the original tool list.

184 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Two-stage Automatic Tool Length Measurement

Note: In the two-stage tool length measurement, only the tool tip is allowed to
move downward toward the probe in the negative direction of the Z axis.

3.5.2.2 G37 Can Designate Non Spindle Parallel Axis to Do Automatic

Tool Length Measurement

The G37 command can specify the non-spindle parallel axis to perform the automatic
tool length measurement function format such as: G37 X_Q_D_F_E_ or G37
Y_Q_D_F_E_. The relevant steps and settings of the automatic tool length
measurement are as described above.

example:
G37 X10 Q_ D_ F_ E_

In this line of instructions, the X-axis will perform the automatic tool length
measurement action, and after the measurement is completed, the X-axis
compensation value will be filled in the tool compensation table. (even if the spindle is
set to the Z axis)

185 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.5.3 G40/G41/G42: Tool Radius Compensation

Format:
G41 D_
G42 D_
G40

G41/G42 starts tool radius compensation and offsets the tool to the left/right of the
starting point of the workpiece contour to be cut. Tool radius compensation left/right
deviation judgement is based on the following definition: In the cutting path of the
program, from the direction of cutting advance, the right cutter of the milling cutter is
executed with G42 command; if the cutter is left offset, G41 command is used carried
out.

When editing a program, only the tool number, such as D11, D12..., must be entered.
The set D_ represents the tool number in the "parameter → tool compensation table",
and the offset of tool radius compensation is the radius compensation value set by this
tool number. This radius compensation value is the user's parameter before processing
"parameter → tool compensation table" setting. For example: D12 indicates that the
tool number is No. 12, and the radius compensation value No. 12 is 4.0, indicating that
the cutter radius is 4.0 mm.

When executing the G41 or G42 command, the controller will use the radius value of
the tool number specified by D_ as the compensation value. The D_ value is still
memorized by the controller after being turned off until it is replaced by a new D_ value;
if it is set to D00, it will be regarded as not making any tool radius compensation.

When performing tool radius compensation, the compensation state must be

cancelled with G40 after the machining is completed, and the center point of the milling
cutter should be returned to the actual coordinate point. In other words, when
executing G40 command, the system will move in the opposite direction to the original
left or right compensation value. When using G40, please make sure that the milling
cutter is away from the workpiece to avoid damage.

186 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

In compensation mode, the system will perform tool radius compensation according
to the following principles:

1. Corner path when the workpiece convex cutting:

(1) When the included angle is less than 90 degrees: When the angle between the
two path vectors is less than 90 degrees, the corner path of the workpiece convex
surface has two modes of arc and intersection. This can be set in "Parameter →
Attribute → Check Item → [ ] Arc corner for tool compensation".
i. [ ] Arc corner for tool compensation: If this item is not selected, the CNC
controller automatically calculates the intersection of these two paths. This
intersection point becomes the starting point of the previous block and the
starting point of the back block.

Intersetcion Point of Tool Paths with an Included Angle Less Than 90 Degrees

ii. [] Arc corner for tool compensation: However, if this item is selected, all corner
paths are processed by circular arcs.

Arc Corner of Tool Paths with an Included Angle Less Than 90 Degrees

(2) When the included angle is greater than 90 degrees: When the angle between
the two path vectors is greater than 90 degrees, the corner path of the workpiece

187 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

convex surface is treated with an arc.

Arc Corner of Tool Paths with an Included Angle Greater Than 90 Degrees

2. Path at concave: system auto calculates two path intersection, and this
intersection became pre block end position and start position of back block.

Intersetcion Point of Tool Paths When Cutting the Concave Side of Workpiece

Note 1: The compensation train in block only allow to use linear interpolate
command (G00/G01), otherwise if arc interpolate command (G02/G03) used
will alarm and stop.
Note 2: To change tool radius, or to toggle G41, G42 mode in tool compensation
were not allow.

3.5.3.1 G41/G42: Start-up of Tool Radius Compensation

Tool compensation train in command must pre block of cutting path, after train in tool
compensated, the cutting path will offset left or right a tool radius. The solid line is path
without compensation.

188 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G41/G42: Start-up of Tool Radius Compensation

3.5.3.2 G41/G42: During Tool Radius Compensation

1. Straight-line to Straight-line

189 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

During Tool Radius Compensation: Straight-line to Straight-line

2. Straight-line to Arc

(1) Straight-line to clockwise arc

Tool radius compensation: from straight line to CW

(2) Straight-line to counterclockwise arc

During Tool Radius Compensation: Straight-line to Counterclockwise Arc

190 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3. Arc to Arc

(1) Clockwise arc to clockwise arc

During Tool Radius Compensation: Clockwise Arc to Clockwise Arc

(2) Clockwise arc to counterclockwise arc

During Tool Radius Compensation: Clockwise Arc to Counterclockwise Arc

(3) Counterclockwise arc to counterclockwise arc

During Tool Radius Compensation: Counterclockwise Arc to Counterclockwise Arc

191 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.5.3.3 G40: Cancelling Tool Radius Compensation

Tool radius compensation cancels compensation at the end of the path to the original
tool tip point.

G40: Cancelling Tool Radius Compensation

3.6 Drilling, boring or tapping related can cycle

instructions

3.6.1 G98/G99: Can cycle command returns original starting

height/reference height R point

192 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Format:
G98: Can cycle instruction to return to the original starting height
G99: Can cycle command returns the reference height R point

Canned cycles refer to instructions that can be executed cyclically, such as drilling,
boring, or tapping. The actions of these instructions are similar. The figure 1 below
shows that the tool returns to the original starting height after machining in the G98
command; and in the G99 command, when the action is completed, the tool is returned
to the preset reference height R point, as shown in Figure 2 below.

G98: Retract to Star Height

G99: Retract to Reference Position (R point)

When using the can cycle instruction group, it is only necessary to give a cycle
machining instruction in the first machining hole position. After that, each repetition
machining hole position can be repeatedly processed only by giving its plane position
value. Executing G80 cancels the can cycle command; if the Group 01 G code
(G00/G01/G02/G03/G33) is also canceled, the can cycle command will be canceled.

193 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Reference position in the can cycle program command. In G90 absolute coordinate
mode, R_ value represents the value of reference position; in G91 relative incremental
coordinate mode, R_ value is always positive, representing the original starting height
to the reference position. R distance. The machining depth Z value can be defined by
G90/G91 respectively: in G90 absolute coordinate mode, Z_ value represents the depth
position value; in G91 relative incremental coordinate mode, Z_ value represents the
relative position from the reference position R point to the processing depth bottom
line Distance, this can be positive or negative. The definitions of the machining cycle
instructions in G90/G91 are shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2 below.

G90: Absolute Position Mode

G91: Incremental Value Mode

In addition, in the G91 relative incremental coordinate mode, K_ value can be set for all
cycle machining instructions, indicating that the cycle command will be repeated along
the straight line or oblique line K_ times (for example: repeat drilling), such as "G91 Gxx
Xdx Ydy" Z_ R_ F_ Kk;" indicates that the Gxx (G73~G89) cycle machining
instruction is repeated for k times, and the distance between the adjacent two holes on

194 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

the X and Y axes is dx and dy, respectively.

K_ value=4 in G91 Incremental Value Mode

Note 1: If the G90 absolute coordinate mode is used, the K_ value will have no effect.
The K_ cycle will only be repeated in the same place (X, Y).
Note 2: Some cyclic instructions such as G74, G76, G82, G84, G87, G88 and G89 can
give P_ value, so that there may be P_ seconds dwell time at the machining
depth Z to increase the accuracy of machining depth or The spindle can have
a reversed buffer time at the depth Z (as shown below).

Dwell P_ Seconds

3.6.2 G80: Cancel can cycle instructions

Format:
G80

The cycle command is continuous and effective. Therefore, when executing the same
machining mode, it is not necessary to set the command in each block. When the cycle
command is completed and no longer used, the machining cycle command should be
canceled by G80 to return to the general basic. Instruction status (such as G00, G01, G02,
G03, etc.).

195 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.6.3 G81/G82, G73/G83: drilling can cycle

3.6.3.1 G81/G82: Drilling Cycle/Drilling Cycle with Dwell

Format:
G81 X_Y_Z_R_K_F_ ;Drilling cycle
G82 X_Y_Z_R_P_K_F_ ;Drilling cycle with dwell

The G81/G82 command is for general drilling, and simple boring can sometimes use
the G81/G82 command. When this command is executed, the drill is quickly positioned
to the coordinate position specified by X_Y_, and then it is quickly positioned to point
R. Then, the drill bit is drilled down to hole bottom position Z_ at the set feed rate F_,
and the tool is quickly retracted to the starting point. (G98 mode) or R point (G99 mode)
completes the cycle as shown in the figure below.

Note: In the following illustration, the solid line indicates the feed rate F_, and the
dashed line indicates the speed of rapid positioning (G00).

G81: Drilling Cycle

The G82 command dwell time P_ seconds at the bottom of the hole, all other machining
operations are the same as G81; G82 dwell the tool for a few seconds after cutting to
the bottom of the hole, which can improve the bottom accuracy of blind hole, column
hole and cone hole.

196 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G82: Drilling Cycle with Dwell

3.6.3.2 G73/G83: High Speed Peck Drilling Cycle/Peck Drilling Cycle

with Chip Breaking

Format:
G73 X_Y_Z_R_Q_K_F_ ;High Speed Peck drilling cycle
G83 X_Y_Z_R_Q_K_F_/X_Y_Z_R_I_J_K_L_F_ ;Peck drilling cycle with chip

breaking

G73/G83 were complicate drilling boring can cycle，and it uses peck drilling，each
peck drilling has chip retrace. The peck drilling for drilling can cut off chip and coolant
can get in hole, and has better cooling and lubricate effect.

When G73 executed, drilling tool moves to position X_Y_ rapidly, then moves to
reference high position R_, then drilling tool start drilling a distance Q_ with feed F_
(Q_ must positive value), then retrace a d distance rapidly, repeat this cycle until reach
hole bottom position z_, the retrace distance d is fix value in G73, and d was defined in
item of “parameter -> can cycle”. d as below diagram shows.

G73: High Speed Peck Drilling Cycle

197 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

As shown in the figure below, G83 command operation is similar to that of G73. The
difference is that when retracting, G83 command retracts to the reference height R_ at
every retraction, so that the chip can be taken out of the hole to prevent the chip from
inserting the groove plug increases the drilling resistance or makes the cutting agent
unable to reach the cutting edge. The G83 is suitable for deep-hole drilling.

G83: Peck Drilling Cycle with Chip Breaking

The G83 instruction format is: G83 X_Y_Z_R_Q_K_F_ and G83 X_Y_Z_R_I_J_K_L_F_,
The description is as follows:

Format 1: G83 X_Y_Z_R_Q_K_F_

Format 2: G83 X_Y_Z_R_I_J_K_L_F_
I: Initial depth of feed
J: Reduce the depth of each feed
K: Minimum feed depth
L: Repeat holes

The feed depth at the first feed is the value specified by I, and the feed depth at each
feed will reduce the value specified by J, but the feed depth must not be less than the
value specified by K, since K is used in Specify the minimum feed depth, so change the
number of repeat holes to L.

Usage rule:
 If I is not set, use first format 1.

198 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

 If I is set: use second format 2.

 If I value is 0, drilling hole to bottom non stop.
 If K value is 0, the minimum infeed depth is not specified, and each infeed depth is
the value specified by I.
 Drilling mode use I, J represents the pitch, and format II of I, J conflict, therefore
does not apply to format two drill mode. If you still want to use the format two, can
M95 writing program.

3.6.4 G85/G86, G76/G87, G88, G89: Boring can cycle

3.6.4.1 G85/G86: Boring Cycle/Boring Cycle with Spindle Stop

Format:
G85 X_Y_Z_R_K_F_
G86 X_Y_Z_R_K_F_

This command is applicable to the reaming hole. When the G85 instruction is executed,
it is as shown in the following figure. The reamer is quickly positioned to the designated
coordinate position X_Y_, and then quickly positioned to the reference height R_, and
then re-hinge to the specified hole seating position Z_ at the specified feed rate F_,
still specified. The feed rate F_ rises upwards.

G85: Boring Cycle

When the G86 command is executed, the spindle will stop rotating after reaching the
machining depth Z_, and will return to the original starting height (G98 mode) or the
reference position R_ (G99 mode) at G00 speed, and then the spindle will resume
clockwise rotation.

199 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G86: Boring Cycle with Spindle Stop

3.6.4.2 G76/G87: Fine Boring Cycle/Fine Back Boring Cycle

Format:
G76 X_Y_Z_R_Q_P_K_F_
G87 X_Y_Z_R_Q_P_K_F_

The G76/G87 precision boring holes are all axially specified spindle stops and are
therefore precision boring holes. When G76 command is executed, the boring tool is
quickly positioned to coordinate point X_Y_, and then it is quickly positioned to the
reference height R_ point. After the hole is drilled to the specified depth Z_ at the
specified feed rate F_, the spindle orientation is stopped and the tool tip is pointed to
after the fixed direction, the center of the boring tool is offset by the Q_ value, so that
the tool tip leaves the machining hole surface, and the boring tool is quickly positioned
outside the hole to avoid scratching the hole surface. After the boring tool is returned
to the original starting height (G98 mode) or the reference height R_ point (G99 mode),
the tool center is quickly positioned to return to coordinate X_Y_, and the spindle
resumes forward rotation as shown in the following figure.

G76: Fine Boring Cycle

200 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Note: The offset Q_ must be positive and its value must not be too large to avoid
collisions with the workpiece.

When G87 command is executed, the back boring cutter is quickly positioned to the
specified coordinate position X_Y_, the spindle orientation is stopped, the tool tip
points in a fixed direction, and the center of the back boring cutter is offset by a small
distance Q_ so that the tool tip leaves the machining hole surface. Afterwards, under
the tool, to prevent the tool edge from scratching the newly processed hole surface.
When the tool moves to the reference height R_ hole bottom, it is offset by the Q_
distance in the original angular direction and then the spindle is resumed to rotate, and
the counterboring is started at the specified feed rate F_ to Z_ height. After that, the
spindle is stopped orientated, and the tool nose is offset from the machining hole
surface to the distance Q_, the tool is raised to the original height, and after the Q_
distance is shifted toward the original angle, the cycle is returned to the original
position X_Y_.

G87: Fine Back Boring Cycle

Note: The reference position R of the G87 fin reverse boring and the depth of the
program Z_ value are different from other cyclic machining. The reference
position R point is at the lowest point, and the program Z_ value depth is
above the reference position R point. Because its reference position R point is
at the lowest point, G87 command is not allowed to execute in G99 mode
(back to reference position R point).

201 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.6.4.3 G88: Boring Cycle with Dwell and Manual Retraction

Format:
G88 X_Y_Z_R_P_K_F_

When G88 command is executed, P_ seconds will be paused after machining to Z_

value depth and the spindle will stop rotating. At this time, the operator can safely
retreat the tool to the reference height R_ point or more after manually offsetting, and
then use the mechanical panel to leave the manual control mode. , If the reference
position R_ value or more is not reached, there will be a warning dialog box, and
manual control cannot be closed. In G98 mode, the tool will continue to be raised to
the original starting height; if it is in G99 mode, the tool will no longer move. The X, Y
coordinates do not return to the X_, Y_ positions specified by G88.

Note: After the program determines that the tool is already at the reference position
R_ point or more, it will automatically resume the forward rotation of the
spindle. Please remove the head and hand from the spindle to ensure safety!

G88: Boring Cycle with Dwell and Manual Retraction

3.6.4.4 G89: Boring Cycle with Dwell

Format:
G89 X_Y_Z_R_P_K_F_

202 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

When G89 command is executed, the spindle will feed back to the reference height R_
at the feed speed F_ after machining to the Z_ value depth of the program and dwell
for P_ seconds. In this case, if the G98 mode is used, the spindle will quickly go to the
original starting height again, otherwise it stops moving.

G89: Boring Cycle with Dwell

3.6.5 G74/G84: Tapping can cycle

Format:
G74 X_Y_Z_R_P_K_F_: Tapping cycle (Left hand)
G84 X_Y_Z_R_P_K_F_: Tapping cycle (Right hand)

Since the G74 command is used for left-hand tapping, it is necessary to reverse the
spindle (M04) before executing the G74 command. When executing the G74 command,
the tool is quickly positioned to the specified coordinate position X_Y_, and then
quickly positioned to the reference height R_ point. Then, after tapping at the feed rate
F_ to the hole seating position Z_, the spindle changes to the positive rotation and
simultaneously to the Z axis. The positive direction retracts to the reference height R_
point, and the spindle reverts to the original reversal after retracting to the R_ point.

203 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G74: Tapping Cycle (Left-Hand)

The G84 command is used for right-handed tapping. Therefore, the spindle must be
rotated forward (M03) before executing the G84 command. When executing the G84
command, the tool is quickly positioned to the specified coordinate position X_Y_, and
then quickly positioned at the reference height R_. Then, after tapping at the feed rate
F_ to the hole seat position Z_, the spindle is reversed and simultaneously to the Z axis.
The positive direction retracts to the reference height R_ point, and the spindle returns
to the original positive rotation after retracting to the R_ point.

G84: Tapping Cycle (Right-Hand)

The Q value can be added to the G74/G84 command to perform drilling and tapping.
The steps are as follows:
1. X, Y axis positioning.
2. Position the Z axis to the reference position R_ point.
3. Tap to depth of Q_ value and then return to reference position R_ point.
4. Tapping to 2Q_ depth, then back to reference position R_.
5. Tapping to 3Q_ depth, then back to reference position R_.
6. According to this order tapping to the depth of demand.

3.6.5.1 Rigid Tapping

Format:
M29 S_
M03
G84 X_Z_R_F_

204 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

The M code of the rigid tapping command can be set by the machine parameter, which
is tentatively M29. Please contact the original picking machine factory for the actual M
code. For rigid tapping, the spindle must be equipped with an encoder and the spindle
drive can output a combination of low speed and high torque to perform the operation.
Please make sure that the above mentioned equipment can use rigid tapping.

If only a general AC inverter motor is used instead of the spindle drive, the tapping
depth will be different depending on the speed characteristics of the inverter motor
and the tapping parameter setting, and the tapping may be too deep or slightly shallow.
Please contact the original in advance. Machinery plant confirmation.

To use rigid tapping, you must first set the M29 S_ command in preparation for rigid
tapping and specify the tapping speed. This speed can not be too fast, and the
mechanical manufacturer limits its maximum speed in the mechanical parameters. If
the given S_ is greater than the set value in the mechanical parameters, it will be
replaced by the set value in the mechanical parameters.

Note: The M code and S code of the rigid tapping mode remain active in the cycle
command until the command cancels.

If there is a high and low speed shift on the spindle, before performing rigid tapping,
be sure to shift the gear set to the specified rigid tapping gear before using it with the
rigid tap speed adjustment to obtain the correct pitch. Gearless gear sets are gear-free.
The calculation of the rigid tapping distance differs depending on the G94 and G95
modes:

1. In G94 mode, F_ represents the feed distance per minute, S_ represents the
rotation speed per minute, so F/S represents the distance per feed, which is equal
to the desired pitch.

If F=100 mm/min, S=200 rpm, the resulting pitch is equal to 100/200=0.5 mm.
The processing program can be edited as follows:
G90 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 ; Move to the center of the workpiece and Z axis

205 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G49 G54 G94 ; Choose G94 Mode

M29 S200 ; Initiate rigid tapping function S=200 rpm
M03 ; Spindle rotation
G84 X0 Y0 Z-10. F100 ; Starting tapping depth 10 mm; pitch=100/200=0.5 mm
G80 ; End the tapping cycle
M30

2. In G95 mode, F_ represents the feed distance per revolution, which is the desired
pitch.

If F=3 mm/rev, the resulting pitch is F=3 mm irrespective of the spindle speed.
This F_ value can have decimals, so it is also suitable for rigid taps less than 1 mm
pitch. This machining program can be edited as follows:
G90 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 ; Move to the center of the workpiece and Z axis preparation
G49 G54 G95 ; Select G95 mode
M29 S200 ; Initiate rigid tapping function S=200 rpm
M03 ; Spindle positive spin
G84 X0 Y0 Z-10. F0.5 ; Starting rigid tapping depth 10 mm; pitch = 0.5 mm
G80 ; End rigid tapping cycle
M30

Note: In the program, G84 X0 Y0 Z-10. F0.5; F0.5 directly indicates the pitch of
0.5 mm, which makes the program easier to read.

3.6.6 Special application of can cycle instructions (K0)

In the can cycle command line, if K0 is input, this line will not be executed and only used
to load the various parameters of the can cycle, so that the following position
command can be used to execute the can cycle.

Example as below:
G00 Z30.
G81 Z-20.R1.F500 K0 ; This line will not execute a can cycle. It is only used to load depth, reference position, feedrate
X10. ; In X10. position, execute "Depth -20. Reference position 1. Machining cycle at feedrate 500"
X20. ; In X20. position, execute "Depth -20. Reference position 1. Machining cycle at feedrate 500"
X30. ; In X30. position, execute "Depth -20. Reference position 1. Machining cycle at feedrate 500"

206 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.7 Rotation, Mirroring and Scaling Commands

 G68/G69: Coordinate rotation/rotation cancel

Format:
G68 X_Y_R_
G69

The G68 command can start coordinate rotation. This rotation effect is related to plane
selection. Therefore, select the X_Y_, Z_X_, or Y_Z_ plane according to G17/G18/G19
to set the center point of the rotation. This X_Y_, Z_X_, or Y_Z_ still belongs to G90/G91.
The instruction is set to absolute or incremental value.

The R_ value indicates the angle to be rotated, and the positive and negative values
indicate the counterclockwise/clockwise rotation, respectively. This R_ value can be set
as "absolute value" or "incremental value" by "Parameter → Rotation →
Absolute/Incremental angle value". If the incremental value is selected and G91 mode
is used, the rotation angle will be incremented until G69 cancels the coordinate rotation
command. This rotation angle is reset to zero.

G68: Coordinate System Rotation

The relationship between G68 and G17/G18/G19 is as follows:

G68 and Different Plane Selection (G17/G18/G19)

207 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

 G50/G51：Cancel/Scale Up, Zoom Out, and Mirror

Format：
G50
G51 X_Y_Z_I_J_K_ or G51 X_Y_Z_P_

The G51 command can start scaling and mirroring. This function uses X_Y_Z_ to set its
center point. If the ratio of three axes is the same, the P_ value can represent the scale
value to be enlarged or reduced. The P_ value can only be a positive integer value. If it
is negative, it will be considered invalid. If the P_ value or I_, J_, K_ value is not set or
is set to a negative value, the P value set by "parameter→amplification ratio" is
proportional value.

If the three axes are respectively enlarged or reduced in different proportions, the
format of X_Y_Z_I_J_K_ must be used, where I_, J_, and K_ represent the
proportions of the X, Y, and Z axes to be enlarged or reduced, respectively. The
minimum integer value of this I_, J_, K_, or P_ can be represented by "0.001" or 0.0001
(3 digits/4 significant digits) as "parameter→amplification ratio→effective number of
scaling values", if P1000 is under 3 significant digits. That means 1.000 times.

If I_, J_, or K_ is a negative value, it corresponds to the mirror effect of the axis; this
mirroring effect is related to the plane selection, which depends on the G17/G18/G19
plane selection to determine the negative image to I_J_, I_K_, or J_K_. If I_, J_, or
K_ are available, but one of I_, J_, or K_ is not given, the value of "Axis →
Magnification → X value (Y value or Z value)" pre-assigned by the parameter is the
value of each axis.

Scaling at Same Magnification Rate along All Axes

208 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

The diagram of the unequal ratio of the two axes: (note the shift of the center point of
the arc, and use a larger proportion of the radius)

Scaling at Different Magnification Rate along Each Individual Axis

Biaxially proportional mirror image:

Mirroring along Y-axis and Scaling along X- and Y-axis at Same Magnification Rate

Note 1: The fourth axis is not affected by the G51, ie there is no scaling or scaling.
Note 2: X_Y_Z_ is determined by G90/G91 as absolute coordinate or relative
increment.
Note 3: Any two-axis arc that is not proportionally enlarged or reduced will use a
larger proportion of the radius as the new radius value and recalculate the
center of the circle with this new radius.
Note 4: If G50/G51 and G68/G69 are mixed, the processing sequence is G51 and
then G68. If you want to cancel G69 and then G50, the program should be
written in this order. Otherwise, it is regarded as an error.
Note 5: Coordinate system rotation (G68) and magnifying/minifying by scale
function (G51) are not supported under G168/G158 modes.

209 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.8 Spindle Control Commands

3.8.1 M03/M04/M05: Spindle On Clockwise/Spindle On

Counterclockwise/Spindle Stop

Format:
M03 S_ : Spindle rotates clockwise
M04 S_ : Spindle rotates counter clockwise
M05 : Spindle stop

When M03/M04/M05 and the axial feed command are on the same line, the machine
factory usually designs the M03/M04 and axial feed simultaneously with the PLC
planning and M05 is executed after the axial feed is completed. M03/M04/M05 should
be separated by one line as much as possible to avoid that the cutting speed has not
been reached yet, or that the spindle has stopped rotating while cutting.

3.8.2 S Code: Spindle Speed Setting

Format:
Sxxxxxx : Spindle speed per minute in rpm

The spindle rpm rpm is usually expressed as a 4-digit number up to 6 digits. The S code
is only used to set the spindle speed and does not cause the spindle to rotate. When
the M03 (spindle forward) or M04 (spindle reverse) command is required, the spindle
will start to rotate.

210 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.8.3 G96/G97: Constant Surface Speed Control/Constant

Surface Speed Control Cancellation

Format:
G96 S_
G97 S_

The constant surface speed control assumes that the Z-axis is the rotation axis of the
workpiece, and the X-axis is the radius of the workpiece. Therefore, before performing
the constant surface speed control, the X-axis coordinate zero must be set on the
workpiece center axis to obtain the desired surface. Speed; The speed of the spindle
will also gradually increase as the radius (X-axis) becomes smaller.

The G96 command enables constant surface speed control, which means that the
workpiece is turned by the given surface feed speed S_ for surface cutting. The S_ can
have up to five digits, its units are in m/min (metric meters per minute) in the metric
system, and the inch system is in inches/min (inch per minute). The G97 command
cancels the constant surface speed control and restores the S_ value to fixed speed
control (rpm) per minute.

Constant Surface Speed Control

Relationship of Spindle Rotation Speed and Radius of Work

211 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.8.4 G93: Inverse Time Feed

The general feed rate can be divided into G94 per minute feed rate and G95 per
revolution feed rate. For details, please refer to G94/G95: Feed rate control per
minute/per revolution. Its format and unit are as follows:

Formation example Metric units Inch units

G94
G01 X_ F_; mm/min inch/mm
G95
G01 X_ F_; mm/rev inch/rev

The G93 time-count feed function can be used for multi-axis machining. The G94 or
G95 mode is used when the program is started. If the program executes the G93
command, the unit of F_ in the program becomes 1/min.

In G01, the actual execution speed of this block is:

L（length）* F_

In G02 or G03, the actual execution speed of this block is:

R（radius）* F_

The comparison of G93, G94 and G95 is as follows:

Actual movement speed of

G01 actual movement speed
G02 or G03

G93 Metric (1/min) L*F R*F

G93 Inch (1/min) L*F R*F

G94 Metric (mm/min) F F

G94 Inch (inch/min) F F

G95 Metric (mm/rev) S*F S*F

G95 Inch (inch/rev) S*F S*F

Note:

F: F Code value

212 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

R: The arc radius value of this single section

L: The length of this block
S: Spindle speed at the time

Precautions when using G93:

1. The program starts in G94 or G95 mode, so be sure to use G93 to open the time
countdown feed mode.
2. G93 is valid only for program blocks of G01, G02, and G03.
3. There must be an F code in each section of the G93 implementation, otherwise the
program will generate an error.
4. There must be an F code in each section of the G93 implementation, otherwise the
program will generate an error.

G93 program example:

G93 G01 X100 F0.5 ；X-axis travel length L=100mm and must arrive within 2 minutes

Calculation instructions:
X-axis travel length L = 100 mm tzo reach in 2 minutes,
the actual feed rate is 100 mm/2 min = 50 mm/min
100 mm/min  F = 50 mm/min, F = 0.5

3.8.5 G94/G95: Feed rate control per minute/per revolution

Format:
G94 F_
G95 F_

The G95 command setting F_ is the feed speed per revolution. The tool cuts the surface
of the workpiece in accordance with the speed at which the spindle moves F_ each
time. The G94 command cancels the feed rate control per revolution (ie, G95 mode)
and restores the feed rate per minute with F_.

213 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Feed Rate in Millimeters (Inches) per Revolution

Note: In the G94 and G95 instructions, the F_ values are defined differently as
follows:
1. If the F_ value in G94 is not given to the decimal point, it will be treated as
having a decimal point after the mantissa. If the value given is a decimal, the
decimal is still valid; therefore, F300 will be treated as F300.0, while F300.05,
F300.6 and other decimals are still valid.
2. If the F_ value in G95 is not given a decimal point, it will be converted to an
integer multiple of the minimum unit of the system. If the value given is a
decimal, the decimal is still valid; therefore when the minimum unit of the
system is 0.001, F300 will be treated as if it is F0.300, and the fractions such
as F300.05 and F300.6 are still valid.
3. From the above definition, the range of F_ values can be sorted out:

G21 (Metric unit input) G20 (Inch unit input)

F0.001~F60000 F0.0001~F2362
G94 mode feed per minute
(0.001~60000 mm/min) (0.0001~2362 inch/min)

Feed per revolution in G95 F0.001~F999.999 F0.0001~F39.3700

mode (0.001~999.999 mm/rev) (0.0001~39.3700 mm/rev)

214 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.9 Units and Position Commands

3.9.1 G17/G18/G19: Plane Selection

Format:
G17: select XY plane
G18: select ZX plane
G19: select YZ plane

The G17, G18 and G19 commands are used for plane selection. The power-on state is
preset to the G17 XY plane. Some G codes (such as round and chamfer of G01, G02/G03,
G16, G41/G42 and G68, etc.) only act on the specified plane. Therefore, the G code of
the selection plane must be input before those G codes. In addition, the fourth axis has
no effect on these G codes at all.

G17/G18/G19: Plane Selection

3.9.2 G20/G21: Programming in Imperial/Metric

The unit of coordinate or displacement in the program can be metric or Inch. The unit
that is retained when the power is turned off is the default unit. In the program, G20 or
G21 needs to specify the unit to be selected in the first line of the program. Once it is
set, it cannot be changed in the program; this state can also be changed by the first line
of the program or the single line input command from MDI. The range of valid units is
as follows:

215 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

When the 1 μm option is in effect

Inch 0.0001 ~ 999.9999 inch

Metric 0.001 ~ 9999.999 mm

Note: After G20/G21 is specified in the first line of the program, if you want to
execute the program repeatedly with the M99 command at the end of the
program, an error message will pop up.

3.9.3 G90/G91: Absolute Programming/Incremental

Programming

Format:
G90: Programming in absolute positions
G91: Programming in incremental values

In the axial movement G command give, each axis value its destination and may be an
absolute coordinate value or a relative increment value, which are respectively set by
G90 and G91. If the tool is moved from A (150, 300, 120) to B (100, 240, 90), use the
absolute coordinate planning program (G90) as G90 X100 Y240 Z90; as shown in the
figure below.

G90: Programming in Absolute Positions

Use the relative incremental coordinate planning program (G91) as G90 X-50 Y-60 Z-
30; as shown below.

216 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G91: Programming in Incremental Values

3.9.4 G15/G16: Cartesian Coordinate System/Polar Coordinate

System

Format:
G15: Cartesian coordinate system
G16: Polar coordinate system

In the axial movement G command, the axis values to be given to the destination can
be planned in a cartesian coordinate system or a polar coordinate system and are set
by the G15 and G16 commands, respectively. (The power-on preset is G15 cartesian
coordinate system. To use polar coordinate system, input G16 command).

G15: Cartesian Coordinate System

G16: Polar Coordinate System

Note: The polar coordinate is closely related to the plane selection, so the plane

217 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

selection (G17/G18/G19) must be set first. Polar coordinates also use X, Y, and
Z as their address codes, but the X, Y, and Z values correspond to polar
coordinate radius, angle, and height correspondence tables as shown in the
following table:
G17 G18 G19
X=radius X=angle X=height

Y=angle Y=height Y=radius

Z=height Z=radius Z=angle

The definition of the positive angle is the counterclockwise angle from the first axis of
the plane. (G17: From X axis to Y axis; G18: From Z axis to X axis; G19: From Y axis to Z
axis)

Different Plane Selection in Polar Coordinate System

The G90 and G91 commands are still valid in polar coordinates, the absolute
coordinates or the relative increment radius and angle. When just converting to a polar
coordinate system, the definitions of radius and angle in G90/G91 have the following
possibilities:

218 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Different Combinations of the Radius and Angle in Polar Coordinate System

Note: When the angle is just changed to the relative increment, the angle defined
by the current position point P1 is used as the starting angle, and then the
relative increment angle is added to it; if the current position point is at the
origin, It is starting angle is equal to zero.

Radius and angle in polar coordinates can be defined as absolute coordinates or

relative incremental values with G90/G91, respectively. The destination to be shifted will
vary depending on the order of the radius or angle set as absolute coordinates or
relative incremental values. . It is hereby summarized that such possible combinations
are as follows:

1. When the radius is first defined as an absolute coordinate value

Absolute Radius Value, and Absolute/Incremental Angle Value

2. When the radius is first defined as a relative increment

219 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Incremental Radius Value, and Absolute/Incremental Angle Value

The following is a list of other combinations that may be generated when the radius or
angle is set to be in the order of absolute coordinates or relative increments:

Various combinations of G15/G16

Note: If the current position point P1 is at the origin, then r1=a1=0.

220 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.9.5 G54~G59: Select Work Coordinate System

Format:
G54
G55
G56
G57
G58
G59

The G54~G59 commands can be used to select six different working coordinate
systems. The default working coordinate at power on is G54. The six work coordinates
can be set in the "Parameters → Coordinate Offset" item.

G54~G59: Work Coordinate Systems

3.9.6 G54.1: Extra G54 Coordinate System Offsets

Format:
G54.1 P___

G54.1 can be used by operators who have multiple sets of coordinate offset
requirements. P_ ranges from P001 to P128. The offset of the origin of this 128-group
work coordinate system relative to the G92 preset origin can be set in the "Parameters
→ Extra Parameters → Extra G54 Coordinate Offset" item. After setting, the P_

221 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

coordinate offset in "Extra G54 Coordinate Offset" can be directly specified in the
program.

3.9.7 G52: Set Sub-coordinate System

* INCON-M675 does not support G52 function.

Format:
G52 X_ Y_ Z_ A_

The G52 command can generate a sub-coordinate system within each working
coordinate system, defining the offset of the origin of the sub-coordinate relative to
the origin of the work coordinate system. This sub-coordinate system acts on the six
work coordinate systems at the same time.

G52: Set Sub-coordinate System

222 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.9.8 G92: Set Zero Point

* INCON-M675 does not support G92 function.

Format:
G92 X_ Y_ Z_ A_ ：Program origin setting (M470)
G92 ：Temporary origin

G92 redefines the value of the new position of the tool tip in the work coordinate
system, that is, changes the offset of the G92 setting point from the mechanical home.
At power-on home, the G92 tentative home point is preset at the mechanical origin,
the offset is home; if only G92 is given and no subsequent value is set, the G92 tentative
zero point will be restored to the original machine point.

Note: In the tool radius compensation (G41/G42) or tool length compensation (G43)
mode, the G92 command cannot be enabled to avoid confusion of coordinate
offset values.

G92: Set Zero Point

223 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.10 Program Execution Related Commands

3.10.1 G04: Dwell

Format:
G04 X_
G04 P_

G04：Make program execution dwell X_ or P_ seconds

The G04 dwell instruction is used in the following situations:

 When the spindle has high-speed and low-speed switching, after the M05 command,
dwell with G04 command for a few seconds so that when the spindle is actually
stopped, shift the gear again to avoid damaging the spindle's servo motor.
 Dwell for a few seconds at the bottom of the hole to make the depth of the hole
correct and increase the luminosity of the bottom of the hole, such as drill string pit,
cone crater, cut fish eye and so on.
 When tapping a large diameter thread, dwell for a few seconds to stabilize the speed
before tapping the thread so that the thread pitch is correct.

Note 1: In metric systems, the dwell time can be from 0.001 seconds to 9999.999
seconds. In Inch systems, the pause time can be from 0.0001 seconds to
999.9999 seconds.
Note 2: If X_ or P_ is not given, this command will have the same function as G09.

3.10.2 G09: Non-modal Exact Stop Check

The G09 command can position the tool at the position specified by the program and
perform the positioning check. G09 must be on the same line as the axis movement
command to produce utility. It makes the axis movement instruction confirm the
position has been reached when cutting to the destination. The sharp corners you want.

224 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Note: As G09 and G61 can perform exactly in place, the difference between the two
is that G09 is a single block effective function and G61 is a continuous effective
function.

3.10.3 G60/G61: Exact Stop Check Mode Cancellation/Exact

Stop Check Mode

Format:
G60
G61

The G61 instruction is accurate to in position mode, so that subsequent

G01/G02/G03/G33 etc. commands will be confirmed on arrival at the destination until
G60 cancels this mode. The CNC program generated by the Computer Aided Design
(CAD) is a lot of small line cutting. If the G60 cancels the accurate position mode, these
small line segments will be continuously cut to get the original smooth cutting effect.

Note: Some positioning-related commands, such as G00/G53/G28/G29, have been

automatically confirmed in place at the time of destination. Therefore,
G61/G60 will have no effect on positioning-related commands such as
G00/G53/G28/G29.

3.10.4 M00/M01/M100/M101/M02/M30: Program Stop/Program

End

Format:
M00 : Program stop
M01 : Optional program stop
M100 : Program stop for manual feed

225 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

M101 : Optional program stop for manual feed

M02 : Program end, cursor returns to the end of the program
M30 : Program end, cursor returns to the start of the program

3.10.4.1 M00: Program Stop

If the M00 command is used in the program, the program will stop executing and the
spindle will stop turning and the coolant will turn off when the M00 command is
executed. If you want to continue to execute the next block, just press the start button
or F9 key, the spindle rotates, the coolant turns on, and the program following M00
continues to execute. M00 instructions are generally used as a single block.

3.10.4.2 M01: Optional Program Stop

The function of M01 is the same as that of M00, but it is only effective when M01 in the
status display area of the system shows a light blue background. When M01 does not
have a light blue background, its function is equal to M00. If there is no light blue
background in M01, the M01 command will not be executed, the program will not be
aborted due to M01. If the CNC milling machine performs M00 or M01 after rough milling,
the program will stop execution and the precision milling cutter can be replaced
manually; if you want to continue the finishing milling program, press the start button
or F9 key.

3.10.4.3 M100/M101: Program Stop for Manual Feed/Optional Program

Stop for Manual Feed

M100/M101 is similar to M00/M01, but M100/M101 will start the manual operation
forward or reverse the cutting path feed function after the program execution is
stopped to check the correctness of the cutting path by manual operation; if you want

226 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

to resume the execution of the program , press the start button or F9 button.

3.10.4.4 M02: Program End, Cursor Returns to the End of the Program

M02 command should be placed at the end of the program to indicate that the program
ends here. This command stops the program running and spindle rotating (M05), and
turns off the coolant (M09). Notice that M02 command will not make the cursor return
to the start of the program; the cursor stays at the end of the program instead.

3.10.4.5 M30: Program End, Cursor Returns to the Start of the Program

M30 command should be placed at the end of the program to indicate that the program
ends here. This command stops the program running and spindle rotating (M05), and
turns off the coolant (M09). Moreover, the cursor will return to the start (first block) of
the program. M30 command is more commonly used to end the program than M02.

Note: The Cycle Start button on the machine panel can be set to run the program as
well, please contact your machine maker for further information.

3.10.5 M95/M97/M98/M99: Sectional Program

Cycle/Subprogram Call

Format:
M95 P_P_L ： Sectional program cycle
M97 P_L_ ： Internal subprogram call
M98（filename）L_ ： External subprogram call
M99 ： Return from subprogram (End of subprogram)

227 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Subprogram Nesting

Note 1: If M99 is programmed at the end of the program instead of M02/M03, the
program will repeat executing over and over again.
Note 2: INCON-M84/M86/M86R allows for up to eight levels of subprogram
nesting. Nesting means that one subprogram may call another subprogram,
which may still another subprogram, up to eight levels deep.
Note 3: M95 and M97 cannot be used in DNC execution mode.

3.10.5.1 M95: Sectional Program Cycle

Format:
M95 P_P_L

In the editor program execution mode, the M95 instruction can repeatedly execute a
certain section program in the same program, from N_start (that is, the first P_ value)
to N_end (that is, the second P_ value) L_ times. This section program needs to be
before the M95 instruction. If the second P_ value is not given, it will regard the previous
behavior of the M95 instruction as N_end.

Example:
program SAMPLE95.CNC explain
___________________________________________________________
;SAMPLE OF M95 CALL ;
N10 M_ ;
N20 G_Y_ ;Begin number 1（N20）
N30 X_ ;Begin number 2（N30）
N40 G_X_ ;
N50 Y_ ;
N60 Z_ ;complete number 2（N60）
N70 X_ ;
N80 M95 P30 P60 L5 ;Call execution from N30 to N60，five times
N90 G_X_Y_ ;complete number 1（N90）

228 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

M95 P20 ;Call execution from N20 to N90，once

M95 P30 P60 L2 ;Call execution from N30 to N60，twice
M02 ;program complete

3.10.5.2 M97: Internal Subprogram Call

1. M97: internal subprogram call L_ times

Format:
M97 P_ L_

In the editor execution mode, the M97 instruction is used to call the internal auxiliary
program L_ times. This internal subprogram is the same as the main program in a CNC
file.

This internal subprogram is placed after the main program and has the subscript name
"Oxxxx". This "xxxx" is four digits, which is the P_ value in the M97 instruction; the
subprogram must end with M99 (returned by subroutine) .

Example 1:
program SAMPLE97.CNC explain
___________________________________________________________
;SAMPLE OF M97 CALL ;Main program
G50 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
M03 ;
M97 P1005 L3 ;Call executive subprogram O1005 three times
M97 P2001 ;Call executive subprogram O2001 once
M05 ;
... ...
M02 ;Main program end
O1005 ;subprogram O1005 begin
... ...
M99 ;subprogram O1005 end
; ;
O2001 ;subprogram O2001 begin
... ...
M99 ;subprogram O2001 end

Example 2:
program SAMPLE97.CNC explain
___________________________________________________________
;SAMPLE OF M97 CALL ;Main program
G50 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
... ...
M97 P1005 L3 ;Call executive subprogram O1005 three times
... ...
M30 ;Main program end
; ;
O1005 ;subprogram O1005 begin
... ...

229 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

M97 P2001 ;caling subprogram O2001

... ...
M99 ;subprogram O1005 end
; ;
O2001 ;subprogram O2001 begin
... ...
M99 ;subprogram O2001 end

2. M97 function

The M97 function is described as follows:

Format:
M97 Pp Qq xxxx #yyyy zzzz
.
.
.
Op
.
.
.
M99

among them,
p: The subprogram name of the call definition function.
q: In the Op subprogram, the starting number of the macro variable to substitute for
the function input value. (Followed by digits or macro variables, and can only have
both, there can be no other instruction values, and up to 10 groups of numbers or
macro variables can be set)

xxxx, zzzz (number) : Input value of function p.

#yyyy (Macro variable value) : Input value of function p.
Op : p subprogram.

In the M97 function, the function input value is substituted into the defined function by
a macro variable to perform an operation. The function definition is written as an
internal subprogram and is executed by the M97 instruction call.

When executing this M97 function instruction, the system will substitute xxxx into #q,
the value of macro variable yyyy will be substituted into #(q+1), zzzz will be
substituted into #(q+2), and so on, for Op functions to perform operations.

230 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Example program:
How to write the program:
#30=-146.999
#31=10.000
#71=#31*COSD（#30）
#72=#31*SIND（#30）

Use the M97 function to rewrite the program to:

<Rewrite 1>
M97 P301 Q30 -146.999 10.000
.
.
.
O301
#71=#31*COSD（#30）
#72=#31*SIND（#30）
M99

In the above example, the M97 command line will set #30 to -146.999, #31 to 10.000,
and then call the O301 subroutine.

<Rewrite 2>
(This is a script to demonstrate how to handle input values using macro variables.)
#50=-146.999
M97 P301 Q30 #50 10.000
.
.
.
O301
#71=#31*COSD（#30）
#72=#31*SIND（#30）
M99

In the above example, the first line will first set -146.999 to #50, and the M97 line will
set #30 to the value of #50, -146.999, #31 to 10.000, and then call the O301 Program.

Note: The input values can be separated by a comma (,), which means that the input
values can be separated by spaces or commas (,), such as:
M97 Pp Qq xxxx,#yyyy,zzzz,…………

231 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.10.5.3 M98: External Subprogram Call

Format:
M98 FileName L_
M98 FileName.NC L_

The M98 command is used to call the external subprogram L_ times. This external
subprogram and the main program are not in the same CNC file. It is a separate file;
the subprogram must end with M99 (meaning it is returned by the subprogram).

 If the size of the external subprogram file to be called does not exceed 1.4 MB, the
M98 format is:
M98 FileName L_

FileName is the name of the subprogram to be called. The file name cannot be
appended with the .CNC file extension, and there must be a space between the file
name and L_. In addition, multiple levels of repeated calls can be performed in this
format.

 If the size of the external sub program file to be called is larger than 1.4 MB, the M98
format is:
M98 FileName.NC L_

FileName.NC is the subprogram file name to be called. The file name must be
appended with the .NC extension file name to be executable. There must be a space
between the file name and L_. However, in this format, a multilevel repeated call cannot
be performed.

Subprogram files up to 1.4 MB in size can also be formatted with a .NC extension after
the filename, but they cannot use multilevel repeated calls.

Example:
program SAMPLE98.CNC explain
___________________________________________________________
;SAMPLE OF M98 CALL ;
G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
G91 G00 X100 Y100 ;
M03 ;

232 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

M98 SUB1OF98 L3 ;calling execution SUN1OF98 three times

M98 SUB2OF98 ;calling execution SUN2OF98
M05 ;
... ...
M02 ;

subprogram SUB1OF98.CNC explain

___________________________________________________________
;SUB_PROGRAM 1 ;
G01 Z-10 ;
X50 Y50 ;
G02 X50 Y-50 R50 ;
G01 X-100 ;
G00 Y-200 ;
M99 ;End the subprogram SUB1OF98.CNC and return to the original calling program SAMPLE98.CNC

subprogram SUB2OF98.CNC explain

___________________________________________________________
;SUB_PROGRAM 2 ;
... ...
M98 SUB3OF98 ;calling execution SUB3OF98
... ...
M99 ;End the subprogram SUB2OF98.CNC and return to the original calling program SAMPLE98.CNC

subprogram SUB3OF98.CNC explain

___________________________________________________________
;SUB_PROGRAM 3 ;
... ...
... ...
M99 ;End the subprogram SUB3OF98.CNC and return to the original calling program SUB2OF98.CNC

Note: The size of the file that can be opened in the editor execution mode is limited
to 1.4 MB. If you want to execute more than 1.4 MB of file, there are two ways:
(You must first transfer the file via FTP to the controller hard disk. Ready for
implementation)
(1) Execute in DNC execution mode.
(2) In the main program, M98 calls the sub program. The sub program's subtitle
must be ".NC". For example: If you want to call the file "BIGFILE.NC" with
more than 1.4 MB, you can execute M98 BIGFILE.NC in the main program. The
subprogram name after M98 must have an extension ".NC". If you type M98
BIGFILE only, an error message "File too large" will appear; if you only want
to call a file that does not exceed 1.4 MB, you do not need to add an
extension file. The ".NC" file can no longer be called in the ".NC" file.
(3) INCON-M675 from system version 5.06G or higher the maximum file size in
Program run mode is 5 MB ~ 6 MB (less than 6 MB).

233 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.10.5.4 M99: Return from Subprogram

M99 command should be programmed in the last block of external/internal

subprogram to indicate the end of external/internal subprogram. After M99 command
in the external/internal subprogram has been read, the cursor will return to the main
program and continue to run the remaining blocks. If M99 command is programmed at
the end of the main program instead of M02/M03, the program will repeat executing
over and over again.

3.10.6 M Code Function

The M code function is described as follows:

Format:
Mmm [ ,Hhh ,Hhh ] Qq xxxx #yyyy zzzz .........

Witin,
mm: All legal M codes except M00/M01/M02/M30/M95/M97/M98/M99.
[,Hhh,Hhh]：The H code in the optional M code.
Q: The starting number of the macro variable used to substitute the input value.
(followed by digits or macro variables, and can only have both, and there are no
other instructions, and up to 10 groups of numbers or macro variables can be set.)
xxxx, zzzz（number）：insert value.
#yyyy（Macro variable value）：insert value.

In the function of M code function, the M code defined by the macro variable input
value is substituted into the defined M code to execute the operation. The M code
definition is written as the PLC executes.

When this M code instruction is executed, the system substitutes xxxx into #q in
sequence, the value of the macro variable yyyy is substituted into #(q+1), zzzz is
substituted into #(q+2), and so on, for PLC operation.

234 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

For detailed usage and contents, please refer to M97: Internal Subprogram Call.

Note: The input values can be separated by a comma (,), which means that the input
values can be separated by spaces or commas (,), such as:
Mmm [ ,Hhh ,Hhh ] Qq xxxx,#yyyy,zzzz, .........

3.11 Reference Position Related Commands

The reference point can be used as a temporary stop position for changing the tool or
workpiece during machining. The position of the reference point relative to the
machine origin can be set from "F2 → Parameter → Reference Point Position". There
are at most four reference points.

Before executing reference position related commands, please make the tool move to
the home position beforehand to ensure the accuracy of the reference positions. The
use of check item [] Homing First in "Motion and Speed" dialogue box on the
machine parameter pop-up menu is recommended.

Note 1: If the machine is set to be used directly without homing to meet some
special demands, the current tool position while starting up will be seen as
machine zero position and the reference positions will be shifted as well.
Under such circumstance, if reference position related commands are used,
it is very likely to cause workpiece or tool damage. Please confirm the
machine parameters settings with the machine maker and use item []
Homing First if possible.
Note 2: INCON-M470/M670/M675 from system version 5.07C or higher, users can
designate the axes to move at G00 or G01 speed in G28/G29/G30
commands. If G00 is chosen, the axes will move at G00 speed; if G01 is
chosen, the axes will move at G01 speed. If either G00 or G01 is designated
in G28/G29/G30 commands, the system will adopt the last G00 or G01
speed which is executed in the program. The formats are as below:
G28

235 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G28 [G00/G01] X_Y_Z_A_ (M470)

G28 [G00/G01] X_Y_Z_A_B_C_ (M670/M675)
G29
G29 [G00/G01] X_Y_Z_A_ (M470)
G29 [G00/G01] X_Y_Z_A_B_C_ (M670/M675)
G30
G30 [G00/G01] X_Y_Z_A_P_ (M470)
G30 [G00/G01] X_Y_Z_A_B_C_P_ (M670/M675)

3.11.1 G28: Return to Reference Position

Format:
G28 [G00/G01] X_Y_Z_A_ (M470)
G28 [G00/G01] X_Y_Z_A_B_C_ (M670/M675)

The coordinate position in the G28 instruction format refers to the midpoint coordinate
position. This command allows the tool to move back to the first reference point
(usually the mechanical origin) via the specified middle point by rapid positioning (G00)
movement. By specifying the halfway point back to the first reference point, the safety
of the tool movement path can be confirmed to avoid collision with the workpiece; the
position value of this halfway point can be absolute coordinates or relative increments.
If only the G28 command is given without specifying any axial direction, it will not
operate, and will only operate when there is a specified axis in the command.

G28: Return to Reference Position

236 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.11.2 G29: Return from Reference Position

Format:
G29 [G00/G01] X_Y_Z_A_ (M470)
G29 [G00/G01] X_Y_Z_A_B_C_ (M670/M675)

The coordinates in the G29 command format refer to the coordinates of the destination
point of the tool. This command allows the tool to pass from the first reference point
through the halfway point to the destination point. This ensures that the tool can reach
the point of interest to be machined via this safe path. The waypoint is the point
specified in the G28 command. Before using the G29 command, the G28 command
must be used to prevent the G29 from not knowing the position of the intermediate
point and causing an error.

G29: Return from Reference Position

3.11.3 G30: Return to 2nd, 3rd or 4th Reference Position

Format:
G30 [G00/G01] X_Y_Z_A_P_ (M470)
G30 [G00/G01] X_Y_Z_A_B_C_P_ (M670/M675)

The function of the G30 command is to return the tool to the selected reference point
after passing through the middle point. P_ is the second, third, or fourth reference
point selected; the coordinates in the instruction are the midpoint locations. The

237 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

difference between this command and the G28 command is that G28 is the first
reference point, and G30 is the second, third, or fourth reference point selected. The
coordinates of the second, third, and fourth reference points are set in "F2 →
Parameter → Reference Point Position".

G30 via middle point to second reference point

Note 1: After G28 or G30 tool via middle point to first reference point (G28) or
second, third forth point (G30), if change program coordinate, the middle
point also will change to new coordinate. If G29 is executed tool will via new
coordinate middle point to aim position.
Note 2: Must cancel tool length and tool radius compensation (G49, G40) before
G28 and G30.

3.12 Other Commands

3.12.1 M06: Tool Change

Format: M06

When the program is executed to M06, the CNC controller commands ATC (automatic
tool changer) to perform the tool change action. When tool change is performed, not
the tool can be replaced at any position. According to their different designs, each
manufacturer is in a safe position to perform tool change to avoid collision with the

238 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

bed and workpiece. Z-axis should be moved to the home position before executing
M06 command on safety demand.

Note: This instruction must first confirm that the machine is equipped with ATC. For
details, please refer to the Machine company.

3.12.2 M08/M09: Coolant On/Coolant Off

Format:
M08 coolant water or vacuum start
M09 coolant water or vacuum shuts off

3.12.3 T Code: Tool Number Change and Tool Selection

Format:
Txx
Txxxx

The T code is also called the tool function. The T function is composed of the address
T followed by the number.

Tool replacement depends on the tool library design, some mechanical tool libraries
are disc-type, some are chain-type. ATC is also divided into armless and arm-free two.

Armless ATC way toward the spindle tool magazine, first remove the tool on the spindle,
rotate to the tool you want to change, rise mounted on a spindle. Most of this tool
library is used for disc type more, and it's fixed knife number (knife No.1 must be
inserted back into tool No.1 tool library), therefore, for the tool change instruction
notation: M06 T03.

M06 is a tool change command, when executed, the spindle tool to replace the original

239 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

magazine, then rotate to knife 3 and attach the No.3 knife to the spindle hole. Arm-
type knife change is mostly with the chain tool library and is no fixed knife type (No.1
knife is not necessarily back into No.1 tool library, tool number and tool number is set
on the magazine by a PLC controller which manage). T Tool change of command, this
represents the number to be called after the number of the connected tool. When T
instruction is executed, the call will go to the tool is ready to change position, but no
tool change, so T command may tool change command M06 setting before to save time
waiting for tool change tool of the time.

3.12.4 G10/G11: Parameter Settings Mode/Parameter Settings

Mode Cancellation

Format:
G10 (P_R_L_)
G11

P_: Tool number

R_: Tool radius
L_: Tool length

G10 is the data setting command. In the data setting command line, only G10/G11 and
G90/G91 are available. Other commands are not allowed. Typing the data in the
program as an absolute coordinate value or relative increment value is based on the
status of G90/G91 at that time.

Data setting mode G10 is a continuous valid command and must be closed with G11
command. Otherwise, the system will send an error message when other commands
are to be executed.

The G10 can exist alone in one line to start the data setting mode for use by the
subsequent setting instruction; it can also exist in the complete instruction line form. If
it exists as a complete command line, P_ must be the specified data number that exists.

240 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Example:
G90 G10 P1 R1. L10. ;tool number 1，radius = 1.，length = 10.
G10 P2 R2. L20. ;tool number 2，radius = 2.，length = 20.
G10 P3 R3. L30. ;tool number 3，radius = 3.，length = 30.
G10 P4 R4. L40. ;tool number 4，radius = 4.，length = 40.
G91 G10 P5 R-0.5 ;tool number 5，radius -0.5
G90 G11 ;Close data setting mode

Or,
G90 G10 ;Start data setting mode
P1 R1. L10. ;tool number 1，radius = 1.，length = 10.
P2 R2. L20. ;tool number 2，radius = 2.，length = 20.
P3 R3. L30. ;tool number 3，radius = 3.，length = 30.
P4 R4. L40. ;tool number 4，radius = 4.，length = 40.
G91 ;Switch to incremental mode
P5 R-0.5 ;tool number 5，radius -0.5
G90 G11 ;Close data setting mode

3.12.4.1 Other Applications of G10/G11 Command

1. Tool table setting (I0)

(1) Setting tool table

Format: G10 (I0) P_L_R_W_Q_
P_: Tool number to be set
L_: Tool length set
R_: Tool radius compensation
W_: Tool radius wear compensation value
Q_: Tool length wear compensation value

Sample:
G10 (I0) P3 L-11.1 R5.4 W0.012 Q0.01 ;Set the tool length compensation value of tool number 3 in the tool
compensation table to -11.1, the tool radius compensation value to 5.4, the tool radius wear value to 0.012, and the tool
length wear value to 0.01.
G11 ;Close data setting mode

(2) Get tool table data (the CNC controller must have Macro function to use)
Format: G11 I0 Pn Pm
Pn: The tool data of tool number m is stored to the starting number of Macro, the

241 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

tool radius compensation value is stored.Macro number n, tool length

compensation value Macro number n+1, tool wear value No. n+2, tool length
wear value is No. n+3.
Pm: Tool number to acquire the tool data in the tool compensation table.

Sample:
G11 I0 P50 P3 ;Save the tool length compensation value of the tool number 3 in the tool compensation table to the
Macro 50 and store the tool radius compensation value to the Macro 51 number.Store tool radius wear compensation value
to Macro 52 and store tool length wear compensation value to Macro 53

Note: The function of tool radius wear and tool length wear setting are available for
INCON-M470/M670 system version 5.11E or higher and INCON-M675 system
version 5.10F or higher.

2. Set the pitch compensation value (I1)

First line format:
G10 I1 X_ Pp1 Pp2; X_: Axial, for example, the X axis, XZ in the Z axis, and so on.
Pp1: length
Pp2: home
Second line formation:
Pp1 Pp2; Pp1: Pitch compensation table number
Pp2: Pitch compensation value

END:
G11; Turn off data setting

3. Extra offset (I2)

(1) Set an extra offset

Format:
G10 I2 Xx Yy Zz Aa (M470)
G10 I2 Xx Yy Zz Aa Bb Cc (M670/M675)
X、y、z、a、b、c: additional offsets for each axis to be set

(2) Get extra offset (controller must have Macro function to use)
Format: G11 I2 Pn
Pn: Macro starting number to store additional offsets. If the X-axis extra offset will
be stored in the nth number, the extra offset in the Y-axis will be stored in

242 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

number n+1 and stored sequentially to Macro.

3.12.5 G10.01/G11.01: Sub Spindle Selection/ Main

Spindle Selection

1. Select the second spindle (sub spindle)

Format: G10.01

If the second spindle (sub spindle) is set in the mechanical structure, the sub spindle is
usually in the axial direction outside the parallel axis of the spindle. The G10.01
command is used to inform the controller that the following program starts to use the
sub spindle. G10.01 must be used in conjunction with G10.03, because when the sub
spindle is selected, the coordinate system's corresponding function will be used. That
is, the coordinate axis of the original coordinate system is assigned to the coordinate
system axis in the direction of the sub spindle. When using the sub-spindle for
machining, the tool length compensation function is also required. At this time, the sub
spindle should be able to use any set of compensation data on the "parameter → tool
compensation table" for correction.

2. Select the first spindle (main spindle)

Format: G11.01

Generally, after the system is turned on, the system will use the first spindle (main
spindle). However, if you want to switch back to using the first spindle after selecting
the second spindle with the G10.01 command, you must use the G11.01 command
from the sub spindle. Switch back to the spindle so that the controller can correctly
access the tool table for correction. The G11.01 and G11.03 instructions should be
used together to avoid unintended processing results.

243 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.12.6 G10.02/G11.02: Follow Axis/Follow Axis

Cancellation

1. Start with following axis

Format: G10.02_

In a large span machine (such as a gantry machining center), if the drive motor is
mounted on only one side of the screw, the non-linear error may be caused by the
excessive span and the rigidity of the screw.

In order to solve this problem, in the mechanical design, a two-sided driving method
will be adopted. At this time, the motors on both sides must be completely
synchronized, that is, one side of the motor must follow the other side.

For example, if the machine parameter setting is that the A axis is following the X axis,
the G10.02 A command can be issued to start the A axis following the X axis.

2. Follow the axis off

Format: G11.02_

For example: G11.02 A means to cancel the A axis following.

3.12.7 G10.03/G11.03: Coordinate System

Mapping/Coordinate System Mapping Cancellation

 Start coordinate mapping axis

Format: G10.03_

The basic axes of the Cartesian coordinate system are X, Y, and Z. For mechanical use,
the first spindle (vertical spindle) is generally parallel to the Z-axis direction. However,

244 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

in the side machining, the second spindle (horizontal spindle) A axis or B axis will be
parallel to the X axis or Y axis direction, and the X axis or Y axis at this time relatively
becomes Z in the second spindle coordinate system. Axis, and the A axis or B axis
becomes the X or Y axis.

For example, when the first spindle is parallel to the Z axis, the coordinates are marked
as (X, Y, Z). If the second spindle is parallel to the Y axis, and the second spindle
movement axis is the A axis, the coordinates in the second spindle coordinate system
are marked as (+X, +A, +Y). That is, +X of the original coordinate system corresponds
to the X axis of the second spindle coordinate system and the direction of movement
is the same. +A corresponds to the Y axis of the second spindle coordinate system and
the direction of movement is the same. +Y corresponds to the Z axis of the second
spindle coordinate system and the direction of movement is the same, as shown in the
figure below.

G10.03 Coordinate System Mapping

The G10.03_ coordinate response command allows the user to program in the
conventional (X, Y, Z) coordinates instead of (X, A, Y) when using the second spindle
(horizontal spindle). Corresponding instructions in the G10.03_ coordinate system, in
addition to the corresponding axis, there is a corresponding relationship between the
direction of motion. Therefore, when writing the program, in addition to the specified
axis, the axial direction must also be specified.

Example:
G10.1 ;initiate second spindle
G10.3 +X +A +Y ;Start coordinate system corresponding axis, from (X, Y, Z) to (+X, +A, +Y) coordinate axis
G01 X100. Y100. Z10.
…
...

245 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

...
G49
G11.1 ;Select the first spindle
G11.3 ;Close coordinate axis function, revert to original (X,Y,Z) coordinate system
G01 X100. Y100. Z10.
...
...
...
G49
M40

For example: G10.03 +X +Y -A means that the +X of the original coordinate system
corresponds to the X axis of the second spindle coordinate system and the movement
direction is the same, and +Y corresponds to the Y axis of the second spindle
coordinate system and the movement direction is the same. And -A corresponds to the
Z axis of the second spindle coordinate system. If there is a G00 X0 Y0 Z10.121
command line in the program, quick positioning will be performed to X axis 0, Y axis 0,
Z axis 0, and A axis -10.121, but the directions of motion are opposite.

 Close coordinate axis

Format: G11.03_

Turn off the coordinate system corresponding to the axis function, and return to the
previous axis (X, Y, Z) of the card recorder system.

3.12.8 G10.04/G11.04: Machine Coordinate

Offset/Machine Coordinate Offset Cancellation

 Start mechanical offset

Format: G10.04

This command can compensate for the coordinate error between the sub spindle and
the sub spindle in the mechanical parameters generated after starting the
corresponding axis function in the G10.03 coordinate system.

 Close the mechanical offset

246 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Format: G11.04

Turn off the mechanical offset.

3.12.9 G10.07/G11.07: Rotary Axis Shortest Path

Mode/Rotary Axis Shortest Path Mode Cancellation

Format:
G10.07: Rotary axis shortest path mode (Default status)
G11.07: Rotary axis shortest path mode cancellation

The CNC controller presets that the angle of one rotation of the rotation axis is 360°.
The user can also set the angle of the rotation axis in the limit field of the forward
software. For details, please refer to INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) Integrate
manual. When the rotary axis feed shortest path mode starts, G01 will go to the
destination with the shortest path.

For example, if the rotation axis is originally at 350°, if the destination of the G01
command is 10°, the rotation axis will go to the destination with the shortest path
350°→360°→10° (as shown in the following figure (A)). For example, if the axis of
rotation is originally at 190°, if the destination of the G01 command is 150°, the rotary
axis will go to the destination with the shortest path 190°→180°→150° (as shown in the
following figure (B)) .

If the paths of forward rotation and reverse rotation are equal, the shortest path of G01
will be the forward rotation direction. For example, the axis of rotation is originally at
190°, and the destination of the G01 command is 10°. At this time, the shortest path to
the forward and reverse directions of the rotary axis is 180°. Under normal
circumstances, the axis of rotation will travel in the forward direction to the destination.
(As shown in (C) below)

247 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G10.07: Rotary Axis Shortest Path Mode

Note: This function is only available for INCON-M470/M670 from system version
5.04A or higher. For INCON-M675, all system versions are available.

3.12.10 G10.10: HSHP Parameter Selects

Format: G10.10 P_

G10.10 is a high speed, high precision parameter selection command. INCON-

M470/M670/M675 provides 25 sets of high-speed and high-precision characteristic
parameters for the mechanical manufacturer to set, which can meet the user's different
cutting needs. For example, assume that the machine manufacturer provides the first
group of high-speed, high-precision performance parameters for roughing operations,
and the third group of high-speed, high-precision features performs fine movements.
The user uses the "G10.10 P1" command to perform rough operations in the program.
Cutting, fine-grained with "G10.10 P3" command.

3.12.11 G10.37/G11.37: Save and Set Tool Length

Compensation and Tool Length Wear Values

 Set Macro to tool length compensation and tool length wear

Format: G10.37 Pp (Macro) Qq (Macro)

248 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Assume that the value of the Macro variable in group p is n. This instruction:
1. Set the value of the Macro variable q group to the tool length compensation value
of the nth tool number in the tool compensation table.
2. Set the value of the macro variable q+1 group to the tool length wear value of the
nth tool number in the tool compensation table.

Note: Tool length wear value  |32.767|。

 Remove tool length compensation and tool length wear to Macro

Format: G11.37 Pp (Macro) Qq (Macro)

Assume that the value of the Macro variable in group p is n. This instruction:
1. Take out the tool length correction value of the nth group tool number in the tool
compensation table and place it into the Macro variable q group.
2. Take the tool length wear value of the nth tool number in the tool compensation
table and put it into the macro variable q+1 group.

3.12.12 G10.38/G11.38: Save and Set Tool Radius

Compensation and Tool Radius Wear Values

 Set Macro to tool radius compensation and tool wear

Format: G10.38 Pp (Macro) Qq (Macro)

Assume that the value of the Macro variable in group p is n. This instruction:
1. Set the value of the Macro variable group q to the tool radius compensation value
of the tool number group n in the tool compensation table.
2. Set the value of the macro variable q+1 group to the tool radius compensation
value of group n in the tool compensation table.

Note: Tool wear value  |32.767|。

249 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

 Remove tool radius compensation and tool radius wear to Macro

Format: G11.38 Pp (Macro) Qq (Macro)

Assume that the value of the Macro variable in group p is n. This instruction:
1. Take the tool radius compensation value of the tool group n in the tool
compensation table and put it into the Macro variable group q.
2. Take out the tool wear value of the nth tool number in the tool compensation
table to the macro variable q+1 group.

3.12.13 G10.39/G11.39: Save and Set Tool Life Table

Parameters

 G10.39: Set Macro to Tool Life Table Parameters

Format: G10.39 Pp (Macro) Qq (Macro)

Assume that the value of the Macro variable in group p is n. This instruction:
1. Set the value of the Macro variable group q to the feed length of group n in the
tool life table.
2. Set the value of the macro variable q+1 group to the spindle start time of group n
in the tool life table.

 G11.39: Retrieve the feed length and spindle start time to Macro
Format: G11.39 Pp (Macro) Qq (Macro)

Assume that the value of the Macro variable in group p is n. This instruction:
1. Take the feed length of the group n in the tool life table and place it into the Macro
variable q group.
2. Take out the spindle start time of group n in the tool life table to the macro
variable q+1 group.

250 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.12.14 G10.54/G11.54: Work Coordinate System Offset and

G54 Extra Work Coordinate System Offset

3.12.14.1 Set Macro Variable Values to Work Coordinate System Offset

Values

Format:
G10.54 Qq : Set Macro variable to G54 coordinate offset.
G10.55 Qq : Set Macro variable to G55 coordinate offset.
G10.56 Qq : Set Macro variable to G56 coordinate offset.
G10.57 Qq : Set Macro variable to G57 coordinate offset.
G10.58 Qq : Set Macro variable to G58 coordinate offset.
G10.59 Qq : Set Macro variable to G59 coordinate offset.
G10.54 E Qq : Set Macro variable values to extra coordinate offset values.

Values of Macro variable number q to q+5 will be set to the offset values of G54~G59
work coordinate system.
 Value of Macro variable number q will be set to X-axis offset value of work
coordinate system.
 Value of Macro variable number q+1 will be set to Y-axis offset value of work
coordinate system.
 Value of Macro variable number q+2 will be set to Z-axis offset value of work
coordinate system.
 Value of Macro variable number q+3 will be set to 4th-axis offset value of work
coordinate system.
 Value of Macro variable number q+4 will be set to 5th-axis offset value of work
coordinate system.
 Value of Macro variable number q+5 will be set to 6th-axis offset value of work
coordinate system.

251 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Note: G10.54~G10.59 The Macro Coordinate Offset command is set by the Macro
variable to specify only the coordinate offset of a single axis, as described
below:

Format:
G10.54 Qq ：Set the values of Macro variable number q~q+5
to the offset values of X-, Y-, Z-, and 4th-, 5th-, 6th-
axis.
G10.54 Qq X/Y/Z/A/B/C ：Set the value of Macro variable number q to the
G54 coordinate offset value of X-, Y-, Z-, A-, B-,
C-axis.
G10.54 E Qq ：Set the values of Macro variable number q~q+5
to the extra coordinate offset values of X-, Y-, Z-,
and 4th-, 5th-, 6th-axis.
G10.54 E Qq X/Y/Z/A/B/C ：Set the value of Macro variable number q to the

extra coordinate offset value of X-, Y-, Z-, A-, B-,

C-axis.

3.12.14.2 Save Work Coordinate System Offset Values to Macro

Variable Values

Format:
G11.54 Qq : Extract G54 Coordinate Offset to Macro Variable.
G11.55 Qq : Extract G55 Coordinate Offset to Macro Variable.
G11.56 Qq : Extract G56 Coordinate Offset to Macro Variable.
G11.57 Qq : Extract G57 Coordinate Offset to Macro Variable.
G11.58 Qq : Extract G58 Coordinate Offset to Macro Variable.
G11.59 Qq : Extract G59 Coordinate Offset to Macro Variable.
G11.54 E Qq : Save extra coordinate offset values to Macro variable values.

Offset values of G54~G59 work coordinate system will be saved to the values of Macro

252 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

variable number q to q+5:

 X-axis offset value of work coordinate system will be saved to the value of Macro
variable number q.
 Y-axis offset value of work coordinate system will be saved to the value of Macro
variable number q+1.
 Z-axis offset value of work coordinate system will be saved to the value of Macro
variable number q+2.
 4th-axis offset value of work coordinate system will be saved to the value of Macro
variable number q+3.
 5th-axis offset value of work coordinate system will be saved to the value of Macro
variable number q+4.
 6th-axis offset value of work coordinate system will be saved to the value of Macro
variable number q+5.

Note: INCON-M470/M670 from system version 5.12C or higher, G11.54~G11.59

The work coordinate to extract the Macro variables, specify only the
coordinate offset of a single axis, as described below:

Format:
G11.54 Qq ：Extract the X-, Y-, Z-, and 4th-, 5th-, 6th-axis
offset value, set the values of Macro variable
number q~q+5.
G11.54 Qq X/Y/Z/A/B/C ：Extract the X-, Y-, Z-, A-, B-, C-axis offset value,
set the values of Macro variable number q.
G11.54 E Qq ：Extract the X-, Y-, Z-, and 4th-, 5th-, 6th-axis
extra offset value, set the values of Macro
variable number q~q+5.
G11.54 E Qq X/Y/Z/A/B/C ：Extract the X-, Y-, Z-, A-, B-, C-axis extra offset

value, set the values of Macro variable number

q.

253 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.12.14.3 Set Macro Variable Values to G54 Extra Work Coordinate

System Offset Values (G54.1 P001~P128)

Format: G10.54 Qq（Macro）Pp（Macro）

Let the value of Group p of the Macro variable be n, then this instruction sets the
consecutive six groups of values from the q group of the Macro variable to the value of
the nth group in the G54 Extra Coordinate Offset. Examples are as follows:

If setting:
#90=10 ;Let Macro variable group 90 be 10

Program:
G10.54 Q3 P90 ;Set the macro value of group 3~8 to the value of group 10 in the extra coordinate offset of G54

3.12.14.4 Save G54 Extra Work Coordinate System Offset Values (G54.1
P001~P128) to Macro Variable Values

Format: G11.54 Qq（Macro）Pp（Macro）

Let the value of Group p of the Macro variable be n, then this instruction will take the
extra coordinate offset value of the nth group G54 to the six groups of variable values
from the q group of the Macro variable. Examples are as follows:

If setting:
#90=10 ;Set the value of group 90 of Macro variable to 10

Program:
G11.54 Q3 P90 ;Retrieve Group 10 G54 Extra Coordinate Offset Values to Group 3~8 Macro Variable Values

254 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.12.15 G10.60/G11.60: Macro smooth mode/Macro smooth

mode cancellation

Format:
G10.60: Start macro smooth mode
G11.60: close macro smooth mode

For a detailed description of the macro smooth mode, please refer to Macro Smooth
Mode.

3.12.16 G10.65/G11.65: Switch to Macro Type A/B

Format:
G10.65: Switch to macro mode B
G11.65: Switch to macro mode A

For a detailed description of macro mode A and macro mode B, refer to Macro
Commands.

3.12.17 G10.66/G11.66: Tiny Line Segments Connecting

Function On/Off

If the program is a combination of very small line segments to approach a curve,

G10.66/G11.66 can be used to enable/disable the minimum line segment connection
function.

If the single block speed is 6000 mm/min and the single block length is less than 100
μm, the speed can be maintained at 6000 mm/min after the connection function of the
minimum line segment of G10.66 is started. If it is not started (G11.66), the speed is
Will be lower than 6000 mm/min.

255 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

The default state of the CNC controller when it is powered on is G11.66, which is not
activated.

The user can start the minimal segment connection function with G10.66 at the
beginning of the program.

3.12.18 G71.01/G71.00: 4th-axis Rotation Angle On/ 4th-axis

Rotation Angle Off

In order to respond to certain special applications, such as laser cutting, flame cutting,
glass cutting, etc., the CNC controller developed two commands, G71.00 and G71.01.

In such applications, it is sometimes necessary to add a fourth axis to mount the nozzle.
This nozzle must be controlled to maintain a certain angle of inclination to the
tangential direction of the cutting path on the XY work plane at any time.

3.12.18.1 4th-axis Rotation Angle On

Format:
G71.01 A_E_R_X_Y_

C : The initial direction of the tool.

E : Compensation displacement speed.
R : The fourth axis value of one rotation.
X_Y_ : DXDY compensation value.

The above E partially compensate for speed to recommend 3000.

A_ defines the rotation angle of the 4th-axis (see Figure 3 95 to Figure 3 97). The tool

256 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

projection vector of the 4th-axis keeps a tilted angle with the tangent direction vector
of cutting path. If A_ is left blank, the rotation angle will be seen as zero. Notice that A
is the axial name of the 4th-axis, if the axial name of the 4th-axis is C then the format
should be changed as well. For example: G71.01 C_E_R_. In this instruction, A_ defines
the starting tilt angle. In the cutting path, the projection vector of the nozzle on the
work plane will always maintain this tilt angle with the tangential direction of the
cutting path. If this value is not given, it is regarded as zero.

In this instruction, A is the name of the fourth axis. If the fourth axis is named C, the
instruction must be modified to G71.01 C_E_R_; otherwise, an error instruction
message will appear.

After starting compensation, can not be continuously performed more than one line
G00 command, close rapid displacement compensation function if required at many
times must first G71.00; If you need fixed-point turn, must first put a knife closed
compensation, then open compensation and G00 point and then G01 under the knife.

Note: The angle 90° in the program is expressed as 90.000.

The starting tilt angle of the fourth axis is 0°. If A_ is not given in the program, it is regarded as zero.

The fourth axis shift angle is 90°

257 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

The fourth axis shift angle is -90°

When R_ is defined as the rotation of the fourth axis of the mechanism, the value fed
by the servo motor (generally 360 turns, so if this value is not given, it is regarded as
360.000), which is used as the reference for calculating the angle A_ of the preceding
paragraph. The following figure shows the path when R_ is 360° and -360° when the
starting tilt angle A_ is 90°:

When the starting inclination angle A_ is 90°, the path R_ is 360° and -360°

E_ defines the rotation speed per minute when the fourth axis needs to be rotated in
the two linear paths. The definition of this speed is the same as the feed rate for general
cutting, in units of the minimum amount of movement on the mechanism.

E_ is the rate at which the fourth axis changes direction

258 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Example 1:
program G7101-01.CNC explain

G90

G00 XYZC

G71.01 C270. E30000 R360. X3. Y-1. ;open compensation

G00 X30. Y30. ;G00 moved into position in a single line, and automatically compensate.

G01 Z5. ;ledger

G02 I25. F3000 ;go full circle

;draw cross

G01 Z ;griff

G00 X20. Y30. ;G00 moved into position in a single line, and automatically compensate.

G01 Z5. ;ledger

G01 X55.

G01 Z ;griff

G00 X80. Y30.

G01 Z5. ;ledger

G01 X55.

G01 Z ;griff

G00 X55. Y5.

G01 Z5. ;ledger

G01 Y30.

G01 Z ;griff

G00 X55. Y55.

G01 Z5. ;ledger

G01 Y30.

G01 Z0

G71.00

G0 XYZC

M30

Example 2:
program G7101-02.CNC explain

G90 ;square

259 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G00 XYZC

G71.01 C. E8000 R360. X. Y0.5 ;open compensation

G00 X30. Y30. ;move positioning

G01 Z5. ;ledger, cut a square-sided

G01 Y0.

G01 Z0

G71.00 ;because of the need fixed-point diversion, therefore off compensation function.

G71.01 C. E8000 R360. X1. Y0.5 ;re-open the compensation

G00 X30. Y0 ;The G00 point to complete compensation.

G01 Z5.

G01 X0.

G01 Z0

G71.00 ;because of the need fixed-point diversion, therefore off compensation function.

G71.01 C. E8000 R360. X1. Y0.5 ;re-open the compensation

G00 X Y ;The point to complete compensation.

G01 Z5.

G01 Y30.

G01 Z0

G71.00 ;because of the need fixed-point diversion, therefore off compensation function.

G71.01 C. E8000 R360. X1. Y0.5 ;re-open the compensation

G00 X Y30. ;The point to complete compensation.

G01 Z5.

G01 X30.

G01 Z0

G71.00

G0 XYZC

M30

Glass cutting application instructions:

In glass cutting applications, the tool must be kept in the tangent direction of the
cutting path, for example, a rectangular cut the cutting edge from the current object to
the next edge change, the tool must first put a knife, then a tangential direction of the

260 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

tool to the next before the knife cutting edge.

Glass Cutting Schematic

In G71.01 model provides a positive and G00 automatic function on the tool to the
tangential direction of the next cutting path, It is possible to insert G00 instruction
program in cutting in order to achieve positive automatic tool demand, particular
attention is G00 instruction in G71.01 mode can only exist in a single line cutting
program, not have two consecutive G00 command line, use the following examples:

Example 1: Cutting the use of Z-axis griff or ledger

G54G90 ;

G00X0Y0Z50.C0. ;

G71.01C0.E30000R360.X0.Y0. ;

quickly move to cut the starting point, at this time, the tool will automatically be
G00X0.Y0. ;
positive to the tangential direction of the cutting path.
G01Z0.F1000 ; ledger
G01X30.Y30.F3000 ; cutting

the tool then automatically put a knife to the positive tangential direction to the cutting
G00Z50. ;
path.
G01Z0.F1000 ; ledger

G01X0.Y60.F3000 ;

G00Z50. ;

G01Z0.F1000 ;

G01X-30.Y30.F3000 ;

G00Z50. ;

G01Z0.F1000 ;

G01X0.Y0. ;

261 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G00Z50. ;

G71.00 ;

M30 ;

Example 2: Cutting the use of M code (M10/M11) put a knife / knife

G54G90 ;

G00X0Y0Z50.C0. ;

G71.01C0.E30000R360.X0.Y0. ;

quickly move to cut the starting point, at this time, the tool will automatically be
G00X0.Y0. ;
positive to the tangential direction of the cutting path.
M10 ; ledger
G01X30.Y30.F3000 ; cutting
M11 ; griff

use the G00 instruction to the tool automatically positive tangential direction to the
G00X30.Y30. ;
cutting path.
M10 ; ledger

G01X0.Y60.F3000 ;

M11 ;

G00 X0.Y60. ;

M10 ;

G01X-30.Y30.F3000 ;

M11 ;

G00 X-30.Y30. ;

M10 ;

G01X0.Y0. ;

M11 ;

G71.00 ;

M30 ;

262 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.12.18.2 4th-axis Rotation Angle Off

Format:
G71.00

Sample:
; This example names the fourth axis as the C axis
; Please note that when the program is executed, the fourth axis is home first
G54 X0 Y0 ;
C0 indicates that the fourth axis starting offset angle is 0
G71.01 C0 E10 R-360 ; E10 indicates the rotation rate 10 mm/min
R-360 indicates that the C-axis tool rotates clockwise
G01 Y-20 F200 ;
G01 X-20 ; C axis first rotates 0° to -90° to start this cutting path to keep the tool at the same fixed tilt angle.
G01 Y0 ; The C axis first rotates from -90° to -180° to start the cutting path to keep the tool at the same
fixed tilt angle.
G01 X0 ; The C axis is first rotated from -180° to -270° to begin the cutting path to keep the tool at the
same fixed tilt angle.
G71.00 ; Close the fourth axis fixed tilt angle follow.

Example of G71.00

3.12.19 G65: Call Macro Subprogram

Format:
G65 Pp Qq [Aa][Bb][Cc][Dd]……[Yy][Zz]

p: Subprogram number
q: Macro variable starting number

In the call macro subroutine function, the values from A to Z are set into the macro
variables q to q+25, and the values of the macro variables q+26 to q+51 are set. 0 or 1

263 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

to determine if there is a set value in the q ~ q+25 group.

When executing the G65 call macro sub program instruction, if Aa exists, the system
will set the value of a into the macro number group q and set the value of the macro
number group q+26 to 1, if Bb exists, the system The b value is set to the macro number
group q+1 and the macro number group q+27 is set to 1... and so on for the subroutine
Pp to operate.

The correspondence between codes, macro numbers, and numerical values is shown
in the following table:

Code Macro variable number Value Macro variable number Value

A q a q +26 1/0
B q +1 b q +27 1/0
C q +2 c q +28 1/0
D q +3 d q +29 1/0
E q +4 e q +30 1/0
F q +5 f q +31 1/0

…. …. …. …. ….
W q +22 w q +48 1/0
X q +23 x q +49 1/0
Y q +24 y q +50 1/0
Z q +25 z q +51 1/0

Note: All values such as a, b, etc. are treated as floating-point decimals.

Sample program:
G65 P0120 Q10 X#1 Y10. Z#3

Explain: The system will set the macro number #1 value to the macro number # (10+23),
the 10 to the macro number # (10+24), and the macro number #3 value to the #
(10+25), and so on, so the values of macro numbers #36~#58 are all 0, and the values
of macro numbers #59~#61 are all 1.

264 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.12.20 PRM Command

User could get system parameters by PRM command with corresponding number, and
apply these parameters in macro calculation.

Format example:
#31=PRM[19700] ; Write parameter No. 19700 to # 31.

IF[PRM[19687]EQ1.]GOTO521 ; If parameter No. 19687 is equal to 1., jump to line N521.

Paramete
Parameter meaning Meaning of setting value
r number

Refer to form of "5 Axis Rotary Mechanism".

Five-axis form selection
2: head-head
19680 0: No rotation axial, 2: head-head
12: table-table
12: table-table, 21: head-table
21: head-table

Refer to form of "5 Axis Rotary Mechanism".

Specify first (master) rotation axis in five axis table-table, return 4.
19681
configuration axis number. head-table, return 4.
head-head, return 5.

Axis direction of first (master) rotation axis

Refer to form and option of "5 Axis Rotary Mechanism".
1: on the X axis
AC type of table-table, return 1.
2: on the Y axis
BC type of table-table, return 2.
19682 3: on the Z axis
AC type of head-table, return 1.
4: at the angle formed by XY plane
BC type of head-table, return 2.
5: at the angle formed by YZ plane
head-head, return 3.
6: at the angle formed by ZX plane

Refer to form of "5 Axis Rotary Mechanism".

Specify motion direction of first (master) rotation
table-table, return 1.
19684 axis
head-table, return 0.
0: CW(right hand), 1: CCW(left hand)
head-head, return 0.

Refer to form of "5 Axis Rotary Mechanism".

Specify axis number of second (slave) rotation axis table-table, return 5.
19686
in five axis configuration. head-table, return 5.
head-head, return 4.

Axis direction of second (slave) rotation axis

Refer to form and option of "5 Axis Rotary Mechanism".
1: on the X axis
table-table, return 3.
2: on the Y axis
19687 head-table, return 3.
3: on the Z axis
AC type of head-head, return 1.
4: at the angle formed by XY plane
BC type of head-head, return 2.
5: at the angle formed by YZ plane

265 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Paramete
Parameter meaning Meaning of setting value
r number

6: at the angle formed by ZX plane

Refer to form of "5 Axis Rotary Mechanism".

Specify motion direction of second (slave) rotation
table-table, return 1.
19689 axis.
head-table, return 1.
0: CW(right hand), 1: CCW(left hand)
head-head, return 0.

Offset from X-axis mechanical zero point to first

(master) rotation axis rotation center in X direction
19700 return value of "Rotary Center Position X".
offset.
(table-table)/(head-table)

Offset from Y-axis mechanical zero point to first

(master) rotation axis rotation center in Y direction
19701 return value of "Rotary Center Position Y".
offset.
(table-table)/(head-table)

Offset from Z-axis mechanical zero point to first

(master) rotation axis rotation center in Z direction
19702 return value of "Rotary Reference Position Z".
offset.
(table-table)/(head-table)

X-direction component (table-table) of the

AC type, give 0.
19703 intersection vector formed by first (master)
BC type, return value of "T tilt axis X or Y direction offset".
rotation axis and second (slave) rotation axis table.

Y-direction component (table-table) of the

AC type, return value of "T tilt axis X or Y direction offset".
19704 intersection vector formed by first (master)
BC type, give 0.
rotation axis and second (slave) rotation axis table.

Z-direction component (table-table) of the

19705 intersection vector formed by first (master) return value of "i tilt axis Z direction offset".
rotation axis and second (slave) rotation axis table.

X direction component of the vector formed by

AC type, give 0.
Tool axis and tool rotation axis / (Second (slave)
19709 BC type, return value of "P tilt head shaft X or Y direction
rotation axis) center
offset".
(head-table) / (head-head)

Y direction component of the vector formed by

AC type, return value of "P tilt head shaft X or Y direction
Tool axis and tool rotation axis / (Second (slave)
19710 offset".
rotation axis) center
BC type, give 0.
(head-table)/(head-head)

Z direction component of the vector formed by

Tool axis and tool rotation axis / (Second (slave)
19711 return value of "V tilt head shaft Z direction offset".
rotation axis) center
(head-table)/(head-head)

X-direction component of the vector (head-head)

AC type, return 0.
19712 formed by second (slave) rotation axis and first
BC type, return value of "T tilt axis X or Y direction offset".
(master) rotation axis center

266 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Paramete
Parameter meaning Meaning of setting value
r number

Y-direction component of the vector (head-head)

AC type, return value of "T tilt axis X or Y direction offset".
19713 formed by second (slave) rotation axis and first
BC type, return 0.
(master) rotation axis center

Z-direction component of the vector (head-head)

return value of "i tilt axis Z direction offset"-"V tilt head
19714 formed by second (slave) rotation axis and first
shaft Z direction offset".
(master) rotation axis center

1013.0 System unit return 0.

1013.1 System unit return 0.

1013.2 System unit return 0.

1013.3 System unit return 0.

3.12.21 G10L52 Set 5 Axis Rotary Mechanism

Fill macro variables into 5 axis rotary mechanism by applying G10L52 with
corresponding number.

Format example:
G10L52

N19700R380000 ；set "Rotary center position of X" as 380000

N19701R[#1] ；set "Rotary center position of Y" as the value of #1

N19702R[#1+#3] ；set "Rotary reference position Z" as the result of [#1+#3]

G11 ；disable G10L52 setting mode

table-table

Parameter number Parameter meaning

19700 Set "Rotary center position of X" as the following value of R

19701 Set "Rotary center position of Y" as the following value of R

19702 Set "Rotary reference position Z" as the following value of R

267 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Parameter number Parameter meaning

AC-type --> No effect

19703 BC-type
Set "Tilt axis center X or Y offset" as the following value of R

AC-type
19704 Set "Tilt axis center X or Y offset" as the following value of R
BC-type --> No effect

19705 Set "Tilt axis center Z offset" as the following value of R

3.13 5-axis Commands (INCON-M675 Only)

3.13.1 G168/G169: RTCP On/Off

Format:
G168: RTCP on
G169: RTCP off

Use G168 to start real-time tool rotation center control (RTCP) and use G169 to turn off
real-time tool rotation center control.

After the user presses F10 or the emergency stop button, the system will automatically
return to G169 (that is, the real-time tool rotation center control is turned off).

Program Example:
% ; program begin
G169 ; close RTCP
G17G0G54
G80G49G40
G91 G28 Z0
G91 G28 X0 Y0 ; arrive to position
G90
G0 B0 C0
T3 M6 ; change tool
G43 H3
G0 Z50.
G0 X0 Y0.
G168 ; start RTCP
G179 ; RTCP is not used at G00

268 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

M3 S10000
M08
G0 X20.8 Y2.9 Z10.538
G1 X24.5 Y5.1 Z-1.4 F250 ; Start feed processing
X24.2 Y7.1 Z1.4 B1.1 C-1.2 F1000
X22.2 Y8.3 Z2.7 B1.103 C-1.205
; ...
; ...
; ...
X5.451 Y-7.674 Z-31.01
G0 X11.254 Y4.934 Z1.12 ; Finished processing
G169 ; close RTCP
G0 Z50.
M9
M05
M30 ; program complete
%

Note 1: For details on the preparation of 5-axis machining programs, please refer to
Programming and Usage.
Note 2: G41/G42 is NOT supported in G168 mode.

3.13.2 G178/G179: G00 RTCP On/Off

Format:
G178: G00 RTCP on
G179: G00 RTCP off

Users can use G178 command to activate G00 RTCP and use G179 to cancel G00 RTCP.
G178 command designates G00 positioning motion to process in 5-axis program space
in G168 mode and G179 command designates G00 positioning to process in motion
axes space.

When G00 RTCP is on, it is recommended that to select Line Positioning item in the G00
Mode column of "Motion and Speed" dialog box. In addition, the value of PLC signal
plc.vto3.bit.lnG00 has to be 1. The state of G00 RTCP will be shown in state
window, the default state is G179 (G00 RTCP off).

Note: For a detailed description of the programming of 5-axis machining programs,

please refer to Programming and Usage.

269 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.13.3 G158: Tilted Working Plane

Format: G158 L_ P_ Q_ R_ X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_ U_ V_ W_

The INCON-M86R system provides the G158 tilt surface machining function. For details
on this function, refer to Tilted Working Plane.

3.13.4 G128: Tool Retraction

Format: G128 Q_ R_

The Q_ value can specify the extraction method, and the R_ value specifies the distance
to be pumped. The description is as follows:

0 : Do not extract.
1 : Pull back in the direction of the original tool to the limit of the single axis. (This
item is valid only when the software limit of X, Y, and Z axes is set.)
2 : Pull back in the direction of the original tool to the limit of all axes. (This item is
valid only when the software limit of X, Y, and Z axes is set.)
3 : Pull back in the direction of the original tool to the distance specified by R_. R_
is usually positive. (This item is valid only when the software limit of X, Y, and Z
axes is set.)
4 : Pull positive in the Z direction to the limit.
5 : Pull in the positive Z direction to the distance specified by R_.

3.14 Programming Examples (M–series)

The following are some examples of G-code combinations, by the "F2→help→code"

can also be found in the code sample program.

270 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.14.1 Example of Work Coordinate System: G54~G59

 SAMPL54.CNC
;Please set the parameters as follows:
;Parameters → Coordinate offset
;G54 X0 Y0 Z0
;G55 X200. Y200. Z0
;G56 X400. Y100. Z0
;
G92 X0 Y0 Z0;
G90;
/M03 ;Turn on the spindle
G54 G00 Z0 ;Select the first coordinate system
M98 SUBWORK1 ;Calling subprogram
G55 ;Select the second coordinate system
M98 SUBWORK1 ;calling subprogram
G56 ;select the third coordinate system
M98 SUBWORK1 ;calling subprogram
/M05 ;close spindle
G54 G00 X0 Y0 Z0;
M30;

 SUBWORK1.CNC
;Workpiece cutting subprogram
G90;
G00 X0 Y0;
/G01 Z-5. F500.;
G01 X100. F1500.;
X90. Y10.;
G03 X10. Y90. I-40. J40.;
G01 X0 Y100.;
Y0;
/Z0;
M99

Example of Work Coordinate System: G54~G59

271 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.14.2 Example of Sub-coordinate System: G52

 SAMPL52.CNC
;Please set the same parameters as SAMPL54
;Parameters → Coordinate offset
;Then execute this program
;Compare the difference with SAMPL54
;
G92 X0 Y0 Z0;
G90;
/M03; start spindle
G52 X100. Y50. ;Set sub-coordinates
G54 G00 Z0 ;Select the first coordinate system
M98 SUBWORK1 ;Calling subprogram
G55 ;Select the second coordinate system
M98 SUBWORK1 ;Calling subprogram
G56 ;Select the third coordinate system
M98 SUBWORK1 ;Calling subprogram
/M05 ;close spindle
G54 G00 X0 Y0 Z0;
M30;

 SUBWORK1.CNC
;Workpiece cutting subprogram
G90;
G00 X0 Y0;
/G01 Z-5. F500.;
G01 X100. F1500.;
X90. Y10.;
G03 X10. Y90. I-40. J40.;
G01 X0 Y100.;
Y0;
/Z0;
M99

Example of Sub-coordinate System: G52

272 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.14.3 Example of Tool Length Compensation: G43

 SAMPL43.CNC
;set parameter (parameter->tool table)
;toll number 1 length compensation (=10mm)
;execute program
G90;
/M03;
G00 Z0;
M98 SUBWORK1 ;call subprogram
G43 H1 ;Tool length correction
M98 SUBWORK1 ;call subprogram
G49 G00 Z10;
/M05;
M30 ;program end
;
;change tool length to -15mm
;execute program again
;check different of tool tip

 SUBWORK1.CNC
;cutting program
G90;
G00 X0 Y0;
G01 Z-5. F500.;
X100. F1500.;
X90. Y10.;
G03 X10. Y90. I-40. J40.;
G01 X0 Y100.;
Y0;
Z0;
M99

Example of Tool Length Compensation: G43

3.14.4 Example of Tool Radius Compensation: G41/G42

 SAMPL41.CNC
;First set parameter

273 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

;parameter→tool compensation graph

;tool number 1 radius compensation =2.5 mm
;
;The formal path begins
G17 G90
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
G0 X100. Y100.
M97 P1041 ;calling subprogram O1041
G0 X0 Y0
M01 ;formal path end
;
;Tool radius left compensation started
H1 ;choose first tool table
G41 G0 X100. Y100.
M97 P1041 ;calling subprogram O1041
G40 G0 X0 Y0 ;end G41
M30 ;program end
;
O1041 ; subprogram
G01 X200. F1500.
X190. Y110.
G03 X110.Y190.I-40.J40.
G01 X100. Y200.
Y100.
M99 ; subprogram end

Example of Tool Radius Compensation: G41

 SAMPL42.CNC
;First set parameter
;parameter->tool table
;Tool nimber 1 radius = 2.5 mm
;The formal path begins
G17 G90
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
G0 X100. Y100.
M97 P1042 ;calling subprogram O1042
G0 X0 Y0
M01 ;formal path end
;
;Tool right compensate start
H1 ;tool 1 compensation from tool table
G42 G0 X100. Y100.
M97 P1042 ;calling calling subprogram O1042
G40 G0 X0 Y0 ;end G42
M30 ;program end
;

274 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

O1042 ;subprogram
G01 X200. F1500.
X190. Y110.
G03 X110.Y190.I-40.J40.
G01 X100. Y200.
Y100.
M99 ;subprogram end

Example of Tool Radius Compensation: G42

3.14.5 Example of Polar Coordinate System: G16

 SAMPL16A.CNC
;Hexagon
;Absolute radius and absolute angle examples
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
G16 ;Polar coordinate system
G90 G0 X200. Y60. ;r=200，angle=60
G1 Y120. F1500. ;Then give the absolute angle
Y180.
Y240.
Y300.
Y360.
Y60.
G15 ;Cancel polar coordinate system
G90 G00 X0 Y0
M30

Example of Polar Coordinate System: G16 (A)

275 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

 SAMPL16B.CNC
;Octagon
;Absolute radius and incremental angle example
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
G16 ;Polar coordinate system
G90 G0 X200.Y45. ;r=200，angle=45
G91 G1 Y45.F1500. ;Then give the incremental angle
N10 Y45.
M95 P10 L6
G15 ;Cancel polar coordinate system
G90 G00 X0 Y0
M30

Example of Polar Coordinate System: G16 (B)

 SAMPL16C.CNC
;Hexagon 六角形
;Incremental radius and incremental angle examples
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
G16 ;Polar coordinate system
G91 G0 X200. Y60.
G1 X200. Y120. F1500.;
N10 Y60.
M95 P10 L4
G15
G90 G00 X0 Y0
M30

Example of Polar Coordinate System: G16 (C)

276 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

 SAMPL16D.CNC
;Lotus flower
;Incremental radius and incremental angle examples
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
G91
G16 G0 X100. Y0. F1500.
N10 G2 X250. Y160. R200.
M95 P10 L8
G15
G90 G0 X0 Y0 Z0
M30

Example of Polar Coordinate System: G16 (D)

 SAMPL16E.CNC
;Star fish
;Absolute radius and incremental angle example
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
G90 G16 G0 X200. Y0
G91 G2 Y144. R200. F1500.
N10 Y144. R200.
M95 P10 L4
;
N20 Y72. R200.
M95 P20 L4
G15
G90 G0 X0 Y0
M30

Example of Polar Coordinate System: G16 (E)

277 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

 SAMPL16F.CNC
;Magic crystal
;Examples of absolute radius and incremental angle
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
G90 G16 G0 X100. Y45.
G91 G1 X200. Y162. F1500.
N10 Y162.
M95 P10 L18
G15
M30

Example of Polar Coordinate System: G16 (F)

3.14.6 Other Examples:

 G1 chamfer and fillet example：TS-G1-LR.CNC

;G1 Chamfer and rounded mirror
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
G91
G17 ;X-Y plane
M97 P1217 ;origin route
G51 X Y Z I-1000 J1000 K1000
M97 P1217 ;X axis mirror image
G50
G51 X Y Z I1000 J-1000 K1000
M97 P1217 ;Y axis mirror image
G50
G51 X Y Z I-1000 J-1000 K1000
M97 P1217 ;XY axis mirror image
G50;
G90 G0 X0 Y0 Z0
M30
;
O1217
G0 X8. Y8. Z8.
G1 X20. F500.
Y10. L3. ;Chamfer
X-20. R5. ;Fillet
Y-10.
G0 X-8. Y-8. Z-8.
M99

278 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G1 Example of Corner Rounding and Chamfering

 G51 Mirroring Example：TS16-PLN1.CNC

;Example of G16 polar coordinates on each plane
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
G91
G0 X-40.
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
G17 G16 ;XY axis coordinate
N1 G1 X10. Y30. F1000.
Z10.
X10. Y180.
Z-10.
X0 Y180.
M95 P1L11 ;loop from N1 11 times
G15;
G0 X40.
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
G18 G16 ;ZX axis coordinate
N2 G1 Z10. X30. F1000.
Y10.
Z10. X180.
Y-10.
Z0 X180.
M95 P2L11 ;loop from N2 11 times
G15;
G0 X40.
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
G19 G16 ;YZ axis coordinate
N3 G1Y10. Z30. F1000.
X10.
Y10. Z180.
X-10.
Y0 Z180.
M95 P3L11 ;loop from N3 11 times
G15;
G0 X-40.
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
M30.

279 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Example of G51 Mirroring: TS16-PLN1.CNC

3.14.7 Example of Mirroring and Coordinate Syetem Rotation:

G51/G68

 G51 mirroring example: SAMPL51A.CNC

;Mirror effect on each plane
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
G91
;
G17 G0 X-35. ;XY plan
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
M97 P1234 ;origin route
G51 X Y Z I-1000 J1000 K1000
M97 P1234 ;Mirror image on the X axis
G50
G51 X Y Z I1000 J-1000 K1000
M97 P1234 ;Mirror image on the Y axis
G50
G51 X Y Z I-1000 J-1000 K1000
M97 P1234 ;Mirror image of diagonal third quadrant
G50
;
G18 G0 X35. ;ZX plan
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
M97 P1234 ;origin route
G51 X Y Z I-1000 J1000 K1000
M97 P1234 ;Mirror image on the X axis
G50
G51 X Y Z I1000 J1000 K-1000
M97 P1234 ;Mirror image on the Z axis
G50
G51 X Y Z I-1000 J1000 K-1000
M97 P1234 ;Mirror image of diagonal third quadrant
G50
;
G19 G0 X30. ;YZ plan
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
M97 P1234 ;origin route
G51 X Y Z I1000 J1000 K-1000
M97 P1234 ;Mirror image on the Z axis
G50
G51 X Y Z I1000 J-1000 K1000
M97 P1234 ;Mirror image on the Y axis
G50
G51 X Y Z I1000 J-1000 K-1000

280 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

M97 P1234 ;Mirror image of diagonal third quadrant

G50
G0 X-30.
G17 G92 X0 Y0 Z0
M30
;
O1234
G0 X5. Y5. Z5.
G1 X10. F500.
Y10.
X-10.
Y-10.
X10. Y10.
X-10. Y-10. Z12.
Z-12.
G0 X-5. Y-5. Z-5.
M99

Example of G51 Mirroring: SAMPL51A.CNC

 G68 Rotation and G51 Mirroring Example：TS68-51A.CNC

;Mirroring and rotation on the XY plane
G17 G91
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
M97 P0123 ;Original first quadrant path
G51 X Y Z I-1000 J1000 K1000
M97 P0123 ;Mirror image on the X axis
G50
G51 X Y Z I1000 J-1000 K1000
M97 P0123 ;Mirror image on the Y axis
G50
G51 X Y Z I-1000 J-1000 K1000
M97 P0123 ;Diagonal third quadrant mirror
G50
M30
;
;First level subprogram(Rotate Copy)
O0123
M97 P1234 ;original route
G68 X0 Y0 R90.
M97 P1234 ;Rotate 90° Copy
G69
M99
;
;Second level subprogram(original path map)
O1234
G0 X10. Y5.
G1 X10. Y10. F1500.
X10.
X10. Y-10.
X-10.

281 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

X-5. Y5.
X-5. Y-5.
X-10.
G0 X-10. Y-5.
M99

G68 Sample Graphics (A)

When we modify the contents of subprogram O0123,we get another path:

;Level 1 subprogram (rotate copy)
O0123 ;（case 1）
G68 X0 Y0 R45.
M97 P1234 ;spin 45
G69 ;Copy path
G68 X0 Y0 R-45.
M97 P1234 ;spin -45
G69 ;Copy path
M99

G68 Sample Graphics (B)

;First level subroutine (original path map)

O0123 ;（case 2）
M97 P1234 ;original route
G68 X0 Y0 R45.
M97 P1234 ;Rotate 45
G69 ;copy path
G68 X0 Y0 R90.
M97 P1234 ;Rotate 90

282 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G69 ;copy path

G68 X0 Y0 R135.
M97 P1234 ;Rotate 135
G69 ;copy path
M99

G68 Sample Graphics (C)

3.14.8 Example of Boring and Drilling Cycle: G73~G89

 G81/G85 Can cycle Example：TS16-815.CNC

;Do G81 and G85 can cycle in Polar Coordinate System
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
G90 G0 X50.
G2 I-50. J0 F3000.
G0 X100.
G2 I-100. J0 F3000.
G0 X0 Y0
;
G16
G90 G99 G81 X50. Y0 Z-15. R5. F500.
N1 G91 G81 Y30. Z-10. R5. F500.
M95 P1L10
G15
G90 G0 X0 Y0 Z0
;
G16
G90 G98 G85 X100. Y0 Z-20. R5.F500.
N2 G91 G85 Y20. Z-15. R5. F500.
M95 P2 L16
G15
G90 G0 X0 Y0 Z0
M30

283 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G81/G85 sample graphics

 G73/G83 Example：TS73-83.CNC
;G73 and G83 cycling in cartesian coordinates
;Please set the parameter D value = 3.0
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
G90 G0 X5. Y5.
G1 X70. F3000.
Y15.
X5.
Y5.
;
G90 G99 G73 X10. Y5. Z-25. Q5. R5. F500.
N1 G91 G73 X10. Z-20. R5. Q5. F500.
M95 P1L4
G90 G0 X70. Y15. Z0
;
G90 G98 G83 X62. Z-25. Q5. R5. F500.
N2 G91 G83 X-10. Z-20. R5. Q5. F500.
M95 P2L4
G90 G0 X0 Y0 Z0
M30

G73/G83 sample graphics

284 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3.14.9 Example of Pocket Machining: G70.00/70.01

 SAPG70xx.CNC
;Example of pocket processing
;Before the tool compensation table set radius compensation value in group 1 = 6.0
;And processing cycle parameters set "Retract chip length = 1.0"
G92 X0 Y0 Z5.0
D1;Select Tool Table No.1
G91
/M03
G70.00 G2 X0 Y0 Z-5. U112. V88. W-13. C1. J0.5 K1. Q4. L10. I100 F1000 E650
G0 X130.
G70.01 G3 X0Y0Z-5. R56. W-13. C1. J0.5 K1. Q4. L10. I100 F1000 E650
G90 G0 X0 Y0 Z5.
/M05
M02

G70.00/70.01 sample graphics

3.14.10 Example of Gird Object Pattern Machining: G70.22

 G7022.CNC
;example of gird object pattern machining
;set tool radius of tool table number 1 = 1.0
;
;main program
G90 D1
G0 X0 Y0 Z10.
/M97 P5555
G70.22 C0 I70. J50. A3 B2 D10.
@ G70.10 G41 P5555 X70.0 Y-25.0 Z0 W-3. C2. J1. K0 Q3. R3. I500 E700 F1000
G0 Z10.
X0 Y0
M30
;
;subprogram (describing shape of the pocket)
O5555
G90 G0 X29.5 Y30.9
G1 X45.6
Y37.6
G2 X51.2 R-10.25
G1 Y30.9
X88.
Y42.7

285 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

X80.2 Y44.9
G2 Y49.6 R-8.25
G1 X88. Y52.1
Y65.3
X29.5
Y30.9
M99

Example of Gird Object Pattern Machining: G70.22

286 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

4 INCON-M675

4.1 INCON-M675 Introduction

4.1.1 About INCON-M675 5-axis CNC controller

INCON-M675 is a real 5-axis milling CNC controller newly developed by Intek

Technology. It is equipped with dual-core hardware and features high speed and low
heat. In addition to inheriting the features of the INCON series controllers, it also
provides real-time Tool Rotation Center Control (RTCP) and Tilt working plane rotate
offset (TWP) functions, as well as built-in six machine models and three five-axis CNC
machining program writing methods. Can achieve zero flaw, no dead corner of the
realm.

INCON-M675 is composed of central control unit (DCCU), servo adaptor unit (ASVU),
and general I/O unit (GEXU-HD). All units are communicated via INET network, which
makes wiring and system expanding easier.

The operation, system integration, and PLC signals of INCON-M675 are the same as
INCON-M670. For further information of controller operation, user parameters, and
NC codes, please refer to the contents of this manual; the illustration concerning
system integration and machine parameters, please refer to INCON-
M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) Integration Manual; the explanation of PLC programming
and signals, please refer to INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) PLC Manual.

4.1.2 Introduction of 5-axis Machining

In a general three-axis milling machine, the tool is held by the spindle and is parallel to
the Z-axis direction. The tool rotates to mill the workpiece with only one fixed direction
(as shown in the figure below).

287 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3-axis Machining

The difference in five-axis machining is that the machine table is additionally provided
with two rotating mechanisms so that the tool can cut the workpiece at different angles
(as shown in the figure below).

5-axis Machining

These two additional rotary mechanisms are controlled by the CNC to the axes of the
two rotary axes, usually the B and C axes or the A and C axes.

So a typical three-axis program is written as follows:

G01 X_ Y_ Z_ F_; X_ Y_ Z_ is the tool tip point.

The five axis program is written as follows:

G01 X_ Y_ Z_ B_ C_ F_; X_ Y_ Z_ is the tool tip point, B_ C_ is the tool direction,
F_ is the tool nose point speed.

288 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

4.1.3 Machine Types

The five-axis real-time coordinate conversion function of the INCON-M675 supports

three types, each of which includes two mechanical models, so a total of six mechanical
models can be supported, as described below:

 Form 0, the workpiece rotation is clamped by the rotation mechanism of B (A) and

C axis.

Type 0

 Form 1, the C axis is the rotary axis and holds the workpiece, while the B (A) axis is

the tilt axis and holds the tool.

289 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Type 1

 Form 2, the tool rotation is held by the rotation mechanism of B (A) and C axis.

Type 2

290 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

4.1.4 5-axis Axial Definition

The A-axis, B-axis, and C-axis define the rotation axis, which rotates around the X-axis,
Y-axis, and Z-axis, respectively. The positive rotation direction can be defined by the
right-hand rule (as shown in the figure below). Usually, the steering mechanism of the
machine may drive the tool and may also drive the workpiece. Therefore, the forward
and reverse directions are defined by the direction of movement of the tool that drives
the result.

Five-axis axial definition

In this manual, we refer to the axial mechanism that drives the mechanism as the axis
of motion, and the cutting point and the tool direction that describe the tool are the
axes of the program. The INCON-M675 can program the axis space points defined by
the five-axis program to be processed in real time by converting the coordinates to the
motion axis space according to the mechanism model set in the controller (as shown
below). This conversion is known as Real Time Rotating Center Point Transform.

RTCP conversion

4.2 Programming and Usage

291 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

4.2.1 Programming and coordinate format

INCON-M675 supports the writing of three kinds of five-axis programs. The X, Y, and Z
codes of the three writing methods all define the X, Y, and Z space positions of the tool
tip of the program block, and the rest are (B_, C_) , (A_,C_),(I_,J_,K_) to define the
direction of the tool.

 G01 X0 Y0 Z0 B30 C45 (tool orientation defined by B_ and C_)

Define the direction of rotation of the tool by B_ and C_

 G01 X0 Y0 Z0 A30 C135 (tool orientation defined by A_ and C_)

The direction of rotation of the tool is defined by A_ and C_

 G01 X0 Y0 Z0 I0.354 J0.354 K0.866 (The tool rotation direction is defined

by I_,J_,K_)

292 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

The direction of rotation of the tool is defined by I_,J_,K_

All three of the above programming methods specify the same five-axis program
corrdinate point.

4.2.2 5-axis Coordinate Offsets

The INCON-M675's coordinate shifting system is the same as the INCON-M670 except
that it takes into account the offset of the center of the rotation mechanism.

In addition to the original G54~G59 (or G54.01 P_) and G52 and G92 offset values, the
INCON-M675's 5-axis coordinate shift still requires the rotation of the "5-axis rotation
mechanism" dialog box in the mechanical parameters. The offset between the three
positions of axis center X position, rotation axis center Y position, and rotation axis
reference surface Z position. which is:

Mechanical position M = Offset O + Program position P

Among them, O = G54~G59 (or G54.01 P_) + G92 + G52 + Extra Offset + 5-axis
rotation mechanism offset value (Rotary center position X, Rotary center position Y,
and Rotary reference position Z), That is, in the INCON-M675 five-axis coordinate
system offset system, the three offset values of Rotary center position X, Rotary center
position Y, and Rotary reference position Z have been taken into account.

293 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

4.2.3 5-axis special 3D teaching function

When M675 as stereoscopic 3D on the surface to do the cutting action of the

application, need manually positioning the machining point on the surface of the
workpiece, the 5-axis position of the tool tip to the tool orientation to the teachings of
the program, then execute teach out of the path, to achieve the purpose of processing.

In this special manual teaching mode, operator needs the following operating
functions, make the teaching action easily and smoothly completed, that is, when in
manual mode:
1. When rotating the A(B) axis or C axis, the tool tip in real space does not move.
2. Moving each purpose XYZ axis, coordinate movement specified by the angle of the
A(B) and C Axes at that time as the direct angle of G158.
3. PLC or IClient side can read the current 5-axis coordinates in G168 mode, as a teach
input of the target point.

From system version 5.10M10 or higher, M675 provides 5-axis special 3D teaching
function.

When manually, the system under conditions of G158 L99, the system will enter the
special 3D teach mode, can enter the manual mode before use MDI execution G158
L99 or in manual mode NC_COMMAND_SET_G158_MODE_IN_MANUAL, where
plc.ncCommand.attr.99 to switch to G158 L99.

In the special 3D teach mode can be used NC_COMMAND_SET_G168_MODE_NORMAL

switch to the G168 mode to meet the teaching operation needs.

PLC program example:

void plcRun(Status &sts, PlcBlock &plc)
{
// ...

// manual
if( sts.state0.bManual ) {

if( iG158InManual && sts.state0.bManualMode != 3 && // 3 is HOME

( !sts.mode2.mG158 ||
( sts.mode2.mG158 && sts.curG158OffsetNo!=plcLongData[9] ) ) ) {
if( !plc.ncCommand.flag ) {
plc.ncCommand.flag = NC_COMMAND_SET_G158_MODE_IN_MANUAL;

294 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

plc.ncCommand.attr = plcLongData[9]; // L number

}
}

if( plc.ncCommand.flag ) {
if( plc.ncCommand.finish )
plc.ncCommand.flag = 0;
}
}

// ...

In the single manual mode, jog, handwheel mode, which is the operation such as under
the aforementioned conditions 1 and 2, user operable tool to the target point, then the
position record in the program, the PLC or IClient read sts.pgm5BasePos, that 5-axis
position in the G168 mode.

4.3 Tilted Working Plane (TWP)

The INCON-M675 supports three rotating mechanisms that can control the angle
between the tool and the workpiece to perform 5-axis machining. INCON-M675
provides the G158 real-time coordinate conversion function, which makes the program
instructions in the program space coordinate system convert to the motion space, that
is, the actual movement of the X, Y, Z, B, and C axes to achieve the purpose of five-axis
machining.

In addition to the G158 function, the INCON-M675 provides a Tilt Work Plane feature
that allows three-axis (X, Y, Z) machining programs to be used in any translation and
rotation coordinate system in space. With three-axis machining, the converter can set
the translational coordinate system in any space and convert from INCON-M675 to the
motion space to complete the three-axis machining of any coordinate system. Of
course, it also includes the machining cycle instructions such as drilling, tapping teeth
and so on.

295 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

4.3.1 TWP Coordinates Setting

The tilt plane coordinates are defined in the same way as G54~G59 and G54.1 P_, and
the defined values of the tilt plane coordinate system can be put into 100 groups of
coordinate systems. The coordinate system is specified in the program by the G158 L_
command in the program.

The CNC controller displays the current state of the CNC controller in the state window.
Among them, the three states G169, G168, and G158 are mutually exclusive. In the
program, the G169, G168, and G158 commands are used to control the program
coordinates and the motion space. As shown in the figure below, in G158 mode, the
G158 item in the controller state Window will flash and the L value of the current group
will be displayed at the same time.

M675 State Window (G158 Mode)

The 100 tilted plane coordinate system can be set as follows:

1. Open the "G158 Coordinate offset Dialog Box" setting directly from "Parameter
→ G158 Coordinate Offset".
2. Set the coordinate system by manual dialog box and manual operation.
3. Directly command G158 in the program or in the MDI dialog box.

4.3.2 G158 Command

The G158 instruction mainly starts the tilt conversion function of the G158, and the
controller enters the G158 mode. It contains the functions and actions of the three parts

296 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

in detail, in order:

1. Pull the tool to a safe position.

2. Specify and set the coordinate system.

Rotate the two rotary axes so that the tool orientation is in the Z direction of the new
coordinate system, which is the normal direction of the new coordinate system.

4.3.3 G158 Format

Format: G158 L_ P_ Q_ R_ X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_ U_ V_ W_

Except for L_, all other values, if not written, indicate that the value is 0; L_ If not
specified, the original coordinate system group is used.

 L_ : Specifies the coordinate system group (0~99).

Example:
G158 ；Start tilt plane machining control and enter G158 mode
；Keep using the original coordinate system
G158 L5 ；Start inclined tilt plane machining control and enter G158 mode
；use the fifth group of coordinates
G158 L ；Start tilt plane processing control, enter G158 mode
；use Group 0 coordinate system

 Q_ R_ : Specifies the extraction of the tool.

The Q_ value can specify the extraction method:

0 : Do not extract.
1 : Pull back in the direction of the original tool to the limit of the single axis.

(This item is valid only when the software limit of X, Y, and Z axes is set)

297 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

2 : Pull back in the direction of the original tool to the limit of all axes.

(This item is valid only when the software limit of X, Y, and Z axes is set)
3 : Pull back in the direction of the original tool to the distance specified by R_. R_

is usually positive.
(This item is valid only when the software limit of X, Y, and Z axes is set.)
4 : Pull positive in the Z direction to the limit.
5 : Pull in the positive Z direction to the distance specified by R_.

Example:
G158 L5 ；Use the fifth group coordinate system, no extraction action
G158 L5 Q1 ；Use the fifth group coordinate system, the tool retreat to the
limit
G158 L5 Q5 R20. ；Select the fifth group coordinate system, Z axis upward 20

mm

Note: When the tool extraction method is designated as Q1, Q2 or Q3, if the original
tool direction pulled back is in the negative direction, the tool will not do the
back-out action for safety reasons.

4.3.4 P XXXXX: Coordinates Designation

X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_ U_ V_ W_：Coordinate system setting value for P XXXXX.

Digit Function Value Description

① Rotary order Three rotary orders

0: no rotation
② Coordinates rotary order
1: rotate three times by ABC values

298 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Digit Function Value Description

2: rotate by given direct angles

3: rotate by given normal vectors
4: rotate by given projection angles

0: absolute
③ Coordinates incremental/absolute settings
1: incremental

0: not activate
④ Activate rotary axis
1: activate

The coordinate system is set by translation → rotation → translation to obtain the final
coordinate system.
 X_ Y_ Z_：Specify the first translation.
 A_ B_ C_：Specifies the rotation value. If not specified, the unit is the angle. The
rotation mode is specified by the ② rotation mode, and the rotation sequence is
specified by the ① rotation sequence.
 U_ V_ W_：Specifies the value to be translated in the new coordinate system after
rotation.

4.3.4.1 Settings of Rotary Order and Rotary Mode

There are 4 types of rotation modes:

0 : No rotation, no effect.
1 : The rotation order instruction makes three rotations from the angle value

specified by the A_B_C_ value.

2 : The new coordinate system is specified by the direct angle.
3 : The new coordinate system is specified by the normal vector.
4 : The new coordinate system is specified by the projection angle.

 Rotary mode 1: Three rotations are made from the angle value specified by the
A_B_C_ value.
This rotation mode specifies three rotations in sequence, and the rotation in the latter
order is based on the last rotation of the coordinate system. Each rotation can rotate

299 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

around the X axis or the Y axis or the Z axis, so there may be 81 rotations, but based on
the Euler rotation theorem, the rotation axis does not repeat to define any rotation, so
there are 12 rotations available Define any rotation.

The three rotations are specified by the rotation order, A is first, B is second, and C is
third. The rotation order is a two-digit decimal number. After converting to a two-digit
number, each two-digit number specifies a rotation method.
XX XX XX
#3 #2 #1

Each group of 2 digits XX:

00 Do not rotate
01 Rotate around the X axis
10 Rotate around the Y axis
11 Rotate around the Z axis
#1 The first rotation, specified by the A_ value.
#2 The second rotation, specified by the B_ value.
#3 The third rotation, specified by the C_ value.

Example:
First round the X axis and then around the Y axis, and then round the Z axis to 2 digits.
11 10 01 = Decimal 57
First around the Z axis and then around the Y axis and then around the X axis in binary
2 01 10 11 = Decimal 27
First around the X axis and then around the Z axis and then around the Y axis as a binary
digit 10 11 01 = Decimal 45
First around the Y axis and then around the Z axis and then around the X axis to binary
1 01 11 10 = Decimal 30
First around the Z axis and then around the Y axis and then around the Z axis to binary
2 11 10 11 = Decimal 59
First around the Z axis and then around the X axis and then around the Z axis to binary
2 11 01 11 = 10 Decimal 55

Example of calculation description: Take the previous example of winding the X axis

300 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

and then the Y axis and then the Z axis. For example, the A_B_C_ value is 11 10 01,thus:
1 1 1 0 0 1
32 16 8 4 2 1

The numerical calculation is (321)+(161)+(81)+(40)+(20)+(11)= 57

The second rotation is the rotation based on the first rotated coordinate system, and
the third rotation is also the rotation based on the second.

For example: G158 L1 P10157 X2. Y0. Z10. A20 B20 C-30 U0 V10 W0 specifies
the new coordinate system to be translated first X2 Y0 Z10, then rotate 20 degrees
around the X axis, then rotate around the Y axis by 20 degrees, and then rotate around
the Z axis. Rotate -30 degrees, and then translate the U, V, W specified by U, V, W in the
rotated coordinate system again to 0, Y direction 10, and Z direction 0.

Rotary Mode 1

 Rotation mode 2: direct angle specification.

The angle of the motion axis is directly specified by the A_B_C_ value. If it is the AC axis
mechanism, it is specified by the A_ value and the C_ value. If it is the BC axis mechanism,
it is specified by the B_ value and the C_ value. Normally, in this mode, the rotary axis

301 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

will be selected to be actuated. After the operation, the main axis is perpendicular to
the XY plane of the new coordinate system. If you need to rotate the XY plane again,
you need to add one more line of instructions. Examples are as follows:

G158 L3 P10200 X0 Y0 Z10 A0 B20 C45 U0 V0 W0

G158 L3 P01159 X0 Y0 Z0 A0 B0 C10 U0 V0 W0
；Increment and then turn the XY plane to 10 degrees

 Rotation mode 3: Normal vector designation.

A vector is formed by the A_B_C_ value. This vector is the direction of the tool. It is also
the normal vector of the new coordinate system. If this coordinate system needs to do
another XY plane rotation, you can refer to the example of the direct angle specification
for rotation.

 Rotation mode 4: Projection angle designation.

The A_ value specifies the projection angle formed by the XY plane and the positive X
axis of the new coordinate system. The B_ value specifies the projection angle formed
by the new XY plane and the Y axis. At this time, the X axis of the new coordinate system
falls on the XZ plane of the original coordinate system. Upper (plane with y = 0), where
C_ value specifies the angle at which the last new XY plane is rotated. Examples are as
follows:

Example 1:
G158 P10400 X0 Y0 Z0. A20. B30. C0 U0 V0 W0

Example 2:
G158 P10400 X0 Y0 Z0 A20. B30. C15. U0 V0 W0

302 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Rotary Mode 4

4.3.4.2 Coordinates Incremental/Absolute Settings

The four-digit value of P_ value specifies whether the coordinate system is newly
assigned, or the new coordinate system is formed by adding the specified new
translational rotation value from the original coordinate system value from this row
command. If the number is 0, the new designation/absolute If you specify 1 for
incremental designation, the following two sets of examples specify the same effect.

G158 P00159 X-20 Y30 Z40 A10 B20 C30

and
G158 P00159 X-20 Y30 Z 40
G158 P01159 A10 B20 C30
Are the same.

303 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

4.3.4.3 Set Rotary Axis to Work

If this value is 1, the rotary axis will work and make the tool paralleled to Z-axis direction
of the new coordinate. If this value is 0, the rotary axis will not work.

4.4 Spline Interpolation

The CNC program determines the path of the tool machining movement and requires
the CNC to follow the program path exactly. The G01 command specifies the path of
the straight line. When the spline interpolation function is enabled and the INCON-
M675 controller is allowed to execute the G01 command, the path is made using the
path error between the point and point specified by the curve.

The purpose of the contouring interpolation is to speed up the execution of the

program, or to make the movement more smooth, or to use a curve to connect the
path points, but because the path is not the original straight path, the user must
understand the role of the spline interpolation, to determine Whether to start or set
the size of the error.

Parity interpolation is applied to consecutive G01 commands. If there are other

commands in the middle, there is no effect. For example, there is M code or G11.60
mode in the middle. Therefore, it is suitable for rough and angled programs.

INCON-M675 provides two kinds of spline interpolation. The first one is the error mode.
The path is determined by the user to specify the path error. The second is the over
point mode. The specified path must pass through the position of G01, but between
the point and the point. Allows a curved path, which is determined by INCON-M675.

The user can set the pattern and error of the simulated line interpolation in three ways.
The installed machine and the user use the machine as required.
(1) From the mechanical parameters "Advanced → Motion and Speed → Spline
Tolerance".

304 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

(2) From the mechanical parameters "High Speed High Precision Profile →
SplineTol".
(3) Use G10.67 Pxxx in the program to start the error mode line interpolation, and
xxx is used to specify the error value. Use G10.67 P0 or G11.67 to stop the action
of the spline interpolation.
(4) G10.68 is used in the program to start the over-point mode simulation
interpolation and canceled with G11.68.

Setting of the tolerance of the spline line interpolation

(1) This value sets the tolerance for the spline interpolation, and its unit is um,
ranging from 0 or 8 or 10 to 60000.
(2) When the tolerance value is set to 0, it means that the spline interpolation is not
started, and when this value is 8, it specifies that the over-point mode spline
interpolation is used. The remaining 10~60000 specify the use of the error mode
spline interpolation.

Error mode spline interpolation

(1) When the error pattern is initiated by the spline interpolation, the CNC controller
internally replaces the straight line with an approximate curve to achieve a
smoother movement, but the path and the original linear motion path will form
an error, and the error does not exceed the set tolerance value.
(2) It is recommended that the user use spline interpolation in the condition that the
roughing or confirming error range is within the allowable range. If you are
unsure of the error value you want to use, you can start the test with 100 and then
increase or decrease the result.

Cross-point pattern spline interpolation

(1) INCON-M675 uses the G01 point of the appropriate curve connection program
when the over-point pattern mitigation starts.
(2) Over-point mode is suitable for program application of cutting processing mode.
The curve is defined by a limited number of points. The user can increase the
point to approximate the curve to be processed.

305 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Spline interpolation state representation

If the PLC signal Sts.mode2.mG106789 has a value of 0, it means that the spline
interpolation is not used. When this value is 1, it means that the error mode is used for
the spline interpolation. When the value is 2, it means that the point pattern is used for
the spline interpolation.

When the spline interpolation is active, G00 in the status window will switch to display
G10.67 or G10.68. At this time, the TP value in the status window will flash,
representing the sub-process number of the interpolation.

spline line interpolation summary

The following is an example program and path diagram:

(1) sample program

%
G11.67 ;Cancel the spline interpolation
M97 P0001
G10.67 P700 ;Start error mode spline interpolation, error 700
M97 P0001
G10.68 ;Start point pattern imitation interpolation
M97 P0001
M30

O0001
G90 G54
G00 X0 Y0
G01 X10. F1000
Y10.
X0
Y0
M99

306 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

(2) Path diagram

Path of spline interpolation

Note: For details on the setting of the machine parameters, please refer to
M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) integration manual.

4.5 Quick Guide

Topic Chapter

 INCON-M675 Introduction
→ About INCON-M675 5-axis CNC Controller 4.1.1
→ Introduction of 5-axis Machining 4.1.2
→ Machine Types 4.1.3
→ 5-axis Axial Definition 4.1.4

 Programming and Usage

→ Programming and coordinate format 4.2.1
→ G168/G169: RTCP On/Off 3.13.1
→ G178/G179: G00 RTCP On/Off 3.13.2
→ G158: Tilted Working Plane (TWP) 4.3
→ G128: Tool Retraction 3.13.4
→ 5-axis Coordinate Offsets 4.2.2
→ Tilted Working Plane (TWP) 4.3
→ Set G158 Offset in Manual Mode 2.4.11
→ Spline Interpolation 4.4

307 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Topic Chapter

 Machine Related Parameters

→ "G158 Coordinate Offsets" Dialogue Box 2.5.13
→ "5 Axes Attribute" Dialogue Box 2.5.14

308 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

5 Macro Commands

5.1 Macro Type A

The variable operation design of macro mode A allows the user to be more flexible
when writing a processing program. Variables can be set or defined by the CNC
machining program, defined by user parameters, or set or read by the PLC. Macro
mode A has a total of 1000 variables, including basic arithmetic operators, built-in
functions, logical operators, and conditional loop control. The macro model A uses the
simplest formula, so users can learn macro programs without much learning.

Macro Processor

5.1.1 Variables

Macro mode A provides 1000 variables: from 0 to 999 (#0～#999). The value of the
variable can be set by a machining program, user parameter or PLC.

The start of the variable is #, followed by a number (variable number). For

example:"#210" is a variable numbered 210; "210" is not a variable.

 If the variable is set by a machining program, its expression will be #3=#4+#5.

Variable column indicators are passed to the PLC. The PLC can set variables and the
PLC can also read variables.
 When you want to set variables by user parameters, from the "F2 → Parameters →

309 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Macro Variable Table" will pop out "Macro Variable Table" dialog box for user
settings.
 If you use the macro command variable, the value in the CNC program will be
replaced by a variable. For example: #1=500, #2=120, then G01 X#2 F#1 is
equivalent to G01 X120 F500。

5.1.2 Basic Arithmetic Operations

The macro mode A complies with the four algorithms, the basic math operator. The left
bracket and the right bracket also apply to the macro mode A.

The mathematical operation symbols are as follows:

+ ; plus

 ; minus
 ; multiply
/ ; divide

( ; left bracket

) ; left bracket

= ; Specified

Examples of arithmetic operations:

#3=4 ;#3 is set as 4
#5=#3+2 ;#5 is set as 4 + 2 = 6
#6=#5+(#3-1) ;#6 is set as 6 +（4 - 1）= 9

The parentheses in the expression must be paired, otherwise errors will occur. For
example:
#6=#5/(#7-#8 ;Wrong expression
#6=#5/(#7-#8) ;Correct expression

310 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

5.1.3 Built-in Functions

Macro mode A provides the following built-in functions, where those associated with
a trigonometric function have a "D" which indicates that the unit is an angle, for
example: the circumference is 360 degrees; if no "D" is added, rad is used as a unit, for
example: The circumference is about 6.2832 rad.

Function format definition

SIN、SIND Sine trigonometric function

COS、COSD Cosine Trigonometric Functions

TAN、TAND Tangent trigonometric function

ASIN、ASIND The inverse sine trigonometric function

ACOS、ACOSD The inverse sine trigonometric function

ATAN、ATAND Arctangent trigonometric function

ABS Absolute value

ROUND Integer

BROUND Take rounding value

SQRT RMS value

Examples of functions are as follows:

#4=SIN(#3);
#5=COS(#2+1);
#7=SQRT(#2+#1);
#1=TAN(#4);
#8=ATAN(0.9);

5.1.4 Conditions and Program Flow Control

The program flow control of macro mode A has three conditional forms:IF、IF…ELSE、
WHILE。

1. IF

Format:
IF variable P end line number

311 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Example:
IF #100 P100;
G00 X#3 Y100;
G01 X100 Y#2 F#8;
N100 G53 X0 Z0;
G01 X300 F0.1;
M30;

If the variable #100 value is "non-zero", the program will execute as follows:
G00 X#3 Y100;
G01 X100 Y#2 F#8;
N100 G53 X0 Y0;
G01 X300 F0.1;
M30;

If the variable #100 value is "zero", the program will execute as follows:
G01 X300 F0.1;
M30;

2. IF…ELSE

Format:
IF variable P end of line number A

N end line number A

ELSE P ending line number B

N ending line number B

Example:
IF #1 P100
G00 X800 Y1000;
G01 X1000 Y200 Z-10;
N100 G00 X0 Y0 Z0
ELSE P200
G00 X1600 Y1000;
G01 X1800 Y200 Z-10;
N200 G00 X0 Y0 Z0;
M30;

If the variable #1 value is "non-zero", the program will execute as follows:

G00 X800 Y1000;
G01 X1000 Y200 Z-10;
G00 X0 Y0 Z0;
M30;

If the variable #1 value is "zero", the program will execute as follows:

G00 X1600 Y1000
G01 X1800 Y200 Z-10;
G00 X0 Y0 Z0;
M30;

312 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

3. WHILE

Format:
WHILE variable P end line number

Example:
#7=4;
WHILE #7 P80
G90 G01 Z-10 F0.8;
G91 G01 X100 F1.0;
#7=#7-1;
N80 G90 G01 Z0 F0.8;

the program will execute as follows:

G90 G01 Z-10 F0.8;
G91 G01 X100 F1.0;
G90 G01 Z0 F0.8;
G90 G01 Z-10 F0.8;
G91 G01 X100 F1.0;
G90 G01 Z0 F0.8;
G90 G01 Z-10 F0.8;
G91 G01 X100 F1.0;
G90 G01 Z0 F0.8;
G90 G01 Z-10 F0.8;
G91 G01 X100 F1.0;
G90 G01 Z0 F0.8;

Note: The above three judgment formulae: IF 、 IF…ELSE 、 WHILE nested

conditional evaluation can only have 8 layers.

5.1.5 Macro Smooth Mode

G10.60: Turn on macro smooth mode.

G11.60: close macro smooth mode (Default state).

The default state of the controller is G11.60. If the processing mode is incorrect when
the status is G10.60, the status will return to G11.60.

In G10.60 mode, the fourth line of the status window will be displayed when the
program is executed:
L：000 D：000 H：000 G10.60

313 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Note: In the G10.60 mode, M97 and M99 will not be sent to the PLC to maintain
program execution smoothness.

5.1.6 Macro with Better Readability and Understandability

In order to make the use of Macro more readable, Intek simplifies the calculations. Here
is an example to illustrate:

Example 1:

Old version:
#5=SIN(#20)
#6=COS(#20)
G00 X#5 Y#6

New version:
G00 X( SIN(#20) ) Y( COS(#20) )

Example 2:

Old version:
#10=#5-#6
IF #10 P100

New version:
IF (#5-#6) P100

Note: In this Macro application, the sentence pattern of Macro syntax must be
written between "(...)".

314 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

5.1.7 New Macro Functions

1. Format: GOTO Pxx

This instruction can jump directly to the specified line number Pxx execution in the
program.

example:
GOTO P200
…
…
…
N200

You can specify that the program jumps directly to line 200 to execute.

2. Macro instruction index function

Format: #(#xx)=yy

example:
#4 = 0
#(#4) = 1

Execution result #0 = 1.

315 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

5.1.8 MACRO Examples

1. Pocket machining cycle:

Pocket Machining Cycle

The pocket radius is set by the user via the variable itself; the tool radius is also set by
the user via the variable itself. The flow chart looks like this:

Pocket flow chart

Pocket cycle program:

#2=0;
#3=#1-#0;
#2=#0+#2;
#4=#3>#2;
WHILE #4 P10;

316 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

G01 X#2 Y0 F400;

G02 I-#2 J0 F400;
#2=#2+#0;
N10 #4=#3>#2;
G01 X#3 Y0 F400;
G02 I-#3 J0 F400;
M30;

2. Matrix processing

Macro can be used for matrix arrangement processing, and each axial offset distance
and matrix row and column can be freely set.

The program starts with the following:

;MARCO AND SUBPROGRAM
LIST
;#1：X OFFSET
;#2：Y OFFSET
;#3：LINE N
;#4：ROW M DON'T SET
;#5：TOOL NUMBER DON'T SET
;#6：X G52 OFFSET POSITION DON'T SET
;#7：Y G52 OFFSET POSITION DON'T SET
;#8：SUBPROGRAM NO DON'T SET
;#20：TOOL COUNT REGEST
;#21：ROW COUNT REGEST
;O1111：MATRIX PROGRAM
;O0001：NO1 TOOL
;O0002：NO2 TOOL
;O0003：NO3 TOOL
;O0004：NO4 TOOL
;O0005：NO5 TOOL

The main program is as follows:

O2396(2011-11-01) ;MAIN PROGRAM
G90G54G17G80G40G49 ;State initialization
G52XY
#6=0
#7=0
#20=0
#21=#4
#20=#5-1
#8=1;
WHILE #20 P5 ;According to the number of tools to decide how many times to call the matrix subroutine
M97 P1111 ;Call matrix subroutine
#8=#8+1 ;Call the next subroutine
#20=#20-1 ;Calling matrix times minus one
#21=#4 ;Reload the value of ROW
N5
#6=0 ;Initialize the state
#7=0
G52XY
M30 ;program complete

The matrix subprogram is as follows:

O1111 ;MATRIX SUBPROGRAM
WHILE #21 P100 ;The number of ROW executions
M97 P#8 L#3 ;Call O000#8 subroutine

317 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

#6=0 ;Return X to its original location

#7=#7+#2 ;Y position plus Y offset
#21=#21-1 ;ROW minus one
N100
G90G49G53X0.Y0.Z0. ;Return to mechanical origin
#7=0 ;Return Y to its original location
M99

Other subprogram are as follows:

O0001.....
…
M99

O0002....
…
M99

O0003...
…
M99

O0004...
….
M99

O0005...
…
M99

5.2 Macro Type B

Macro mode B has functions such as variables, mathematical operations, logical

operations, and conditional branching, which can increase the convenience of user
development programs. Users only need to use a simple command in the program to
call a macro, just like calling a subroutine.

Macro Type B

318 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

5.2.1 Variables

The general machining program specifies the movement distance by G code and
number, for example: G00 X100.。

When using the macro function, the user can directly set the numerical value or variable
number. When using a variable number, the value of the number can be modified via
a program or MDI dialog box.

example:
#1=#2+100 ;
G01 X#1 F300 ;

Explain:

 Variable explain

When you want to specify a variable, you need to add the variable number (#) to the
variable number. For example: #1 is the variable of the first group number. The
general program can specify a name for the variable, but the macro does not have
this feature.

The user can also use the expression to specify the variable number, but note that
the expression needs to be written in brackets, for example: #[#1+#2–12].

 Variable type

Variables can be divided into the following four types according to the variable
number:
Variable number Variable type Function Description

This variable state is always undefined and cannot be

#0 Undefined
set.

Intra-regional macro variables can only be used for

specific macros. When the CNC controller power is
Macro variables within
#1 – #33 turned off, the macro variables in the macro will be
a region
initialized to undefined. When calling a macro,
variable values are assigned to the regional variables

319 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Variable number Variable type Function Description

in the macro.

The common variables can be used in a number of

different macros. When the controller power is
#34 – #99
#200 – #499 turned off, the variables #100 to #199 will be
#100 – #199 Shared variables
initialized to undefined, and the values in the
#500 – #999
variables #34 to #99, #200 to #499, and #500 to #999
will be retained.

System variables are used to read and write NC

#1000 – System variables
related data.

 Variable range of values

The value of the variable can be zero or any value in the following range:
 –1047 ~ -10-29
 10-29 ~ 1047

If the system detects that the variable is calculated as an invalid value, an alert
message will be issued.

 omit the decimal point

When defining a variable value in a program, you can omit the decimal point. For
example, if you define #1=123 in a program, it actually means that the value of #1
is 123.000.

 Use variable

To quote the value of the variable in the program, add the variable number after the
address text. When using the expression to specify the variable, the expression must
be written in brackets. For example: G01X[#1+#2]F#3;。

The referenced variable value will be rounded to the least significant unit of the
address. For example, when executing G00#1 on a controller with a minimum
effective unit of 1/1000mm and specifying 12.3456 as the value of variable #1, the
instruction is actually treated as G00X12.346;.

When you need to specify a negative value, you can add a minus sign (-) before the

320 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

macro change number (#). For example: G00X–#1;.

When an undefined variable is referenced, the variable is automatically ignored. For

example, the value of the variable #1 is 0, and the variable #2 is undefined. When the
G00X#1Y#2; instruction is executed, the execution result will be G00X0.

 Undefine variable

When the value of the variable is not defined, the variable is considered undefined.
The variable #0 is an undefined variable. It cannot be written but it can be read.

（a）Use

When an undefined variable is used, the initial text of the variable will also be
ignored. For example, the value of variable #1 is 0, and the value of variable #2
is undefined. When the G00X#1Y#2; instruction is executed, the execution result
will be the same as G00X0.

（b）Operations

The undefined variable (Undefined) is treated as 0 except that it is used to

directly specify the variable as undefined.
When #1 = Undefined When #1 = 0
#2 = #1 #2 = #1
↓ ↓
#2 = Undefined #2 = 0

#2 = #1*5 #2 = #1*5
↓ ↓
#2 = 0 #2 = 0
#2 = #1+#1 #2 = #1 + #1
↓ ↓
#2 = 0 #2 = 0

（c）Conditional formula

Undefined variables will be treated as 0 except for the conditional EQ and NE.
When #1 = Undefined When #1 = 0
#1 EQ #0 #1 EQ #0
↓ ↓
Set up Not set up

321 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

When #1 = Undefined When #1 = 0

#1 NE 0 #1 NE 0
↓ ↓
Set up Not set up
#1 GE #0 #1 GE #0
↓ ↓
Set up Set up
#1 GT 0 #1 GT 0
↓ ↓
Not set up Not set up

 Use restrictions

The program's number and serial number cannot refer to variables. For example,
variables cannot be referenced in the following situations:
O#1;
N#3Y200.0;

5.2.2 System Variables

System variables can be used to read and write NC internal data such as the current
position, tool offsets, etc. However, some system variables can only be read. System
variables are important for the preparation of automation and general programs.

Explain：

 Tool compensation value

Tool offset values can be read and written using system variables. The available
variable numbers depend on the number of tool compensation groups, including
geometric compensation, wear compensation, tool length compensation, and tool
radius compensation. Although the number of tool compensation groups is 1024,
only the first 400 groups have a role in system variables.

322 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Tool Length Compensation (H) Tool Radius Compensation (D)

Compensation
Geometric Length Wear Geometric Radius Wear
Number
Compensation Compensation Compensation Compensation

1 #11001（#2201） #10001（#2001） #13001 #12001

: : : : :

200 #11201（#2400） #10201（#2200） : :

: : : : :

400 #11400 #10400 #13400 #12400

 Macro Alarm

Variable Number Function

When a value between 0~200 is assigned to variable #3000, the controller

will stop and an error message will pop up. An error message which is no
#3000 longer than 26 characters can be quoted after the expression. The screen will
show the alarm number which is 3000 plus the value of variable #3000,
together with the error message quoted at the same time.

Example:
#3000=1(TOOL NOT FOUND);

The image would show "3001 TOOL NOT FOUND".

 Stop and display messages

The variable setting allows the controller to abort when executing the program and
display a message.
Variable Number Function

If command #3006=1 (MESSAGE); is used in a Macro, the program will stop

after execution of the block before the #3006 block. A message (no longer
#3006
than 26 characters) to be shown can be quoted inside the parenthesis ( ). The
quoted message will be shown on the screen.

 Time information

Time information can be read and written.

323 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Variable Number Function

This variable works as a timer and the time unit is millisecond. The timer will
#3001 be reset to 0 every time the controller is turned on. When the counting value
reaches 2147483648 milliseconds, the timer will be reset to 0 as well.

 Continuous effective instruction

The state of the continuously valid instruction from the start to the previous line can
be read.
Variable Number Function

#4002 G17、G18、G19
#4003 G90、G91
#4006 G20、G21
#4007 G40、G41、G42
#4008 G43、G44、G49
#4011 G50、G51
#4014 G54~G59
#4016 G68、G69
#4107 D code
#4111 H code
#4119 S code
#4120 T code

 Current position

Position information can only be read and cannot be written.

Variable Number Position Information Coordinate System Tool Compensation Value

#5021–#5026 Current position Machine Position Not included

#5041–#5046 Current position Program position Included

 The first digit (1~6) indicates the axial number.

 Conditional termination linear interpolation command (G31) the tool position
at signal start is stored in #5061~5066. When the conditional termination linear
interpolation instruction signal is not activated, the end position of the line will
be stored in #5061~5066.

 Coordinate offset

The coordinate offset value can be read and written.

324 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Variable Number Function

#5201 The first axis G92 zero point offset value

: :
#5206
The sixth axis G92 zero point offset value

#5221 The first axis G54 coordinate offset value

: :
#5226
The sixth axis G54 coordinate offset value

#5241 The first axis G55 coordinate offset value

: :
#5246
The sixth axis G55 coordinate offset value

#5261 The first axis G56 coordinate offset value

: :
#5266
The sixth axis G56 coordinate offset value

#5281 The first axis G57 coordinate offset value

: :
#5286
The sixth axis G57 coordinate offset value

#5301 The first axis G58 coordinate offset value

: :
#5306
The sixth axis G58 coordinate offset value

#5321 The first axis G59 coordinate offset value

: :
#5326
The sixth axis G59 coordinate offset value

#7001 The first axis extra G54 coordinate offset value (G54.1 P1)
: :
#7006
The sixth axis extra G54 coordinate offset value

#7021 The first axis extra G54 coordinate offset value (G54.1 P2)
: :
#7026
The sixth axis extra G54 coordinate offset value
: :

#7941 The first axis extra G54 coordinate offset value (G54.1 P48)
: :
#7946
The sixth axis extra G54 coordinate offset value

Although there are 128 groups of extra G54 coordinate shifts, only the first 48 groups
have a role in system variables.

The following variables can also be used:

325 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

First axis Variable number

G92 program origin offset #2500

G54 coordinate offset #2501

G55 coordinate offset #2502

G56 coordinate offset #2503

G57 coordinate offset #2504

G58 coordinate offset #2505

G59 coordinate offset #2506

Second axis Variable number

G92 program origin offset #2600

G54 coordinate offset #2601

G55 coordinate offset #2602

G56 coordinate offset #2603

G57 coordinate offset #2604

G58 coordinate offset #2605

G59 coordinate offset #2606

Third axis Variable number

G92 program origin offset #2700

G54 coordinate offset #2701

G55 coordinate offset #2702

G56 coordinate offset #2703

G57 coordinate offset #2704

G58 coordinate offset #2705

G59 coordinate offset #2706

Forth axis Variable number

G92 program origin offset #2800

G54 coordinate offset #2801

G55 coordinate offset #2802

G56 coordinate offset #2803

G57 coordinate offset #2804

G58 coordinate offset #2805

G59 coordinate offset #2806

326 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

5.2.3 Arithmetic and Logic Operation

Variables can be used to perform the operations in the following table. The right-hand
side of a mathematical sign can be a combination of constants and/or variables and
operators. The variables #j and #k can also be replaced by constants. The variable to
the left of the equal sign can be replaced by an equation.

Function Format Explain

definition #i=#j

Addition, subtraction,
#i=#j+#k;
multiplication and #i=#j–#k;
division/four operations #i=#j*#k;
#i=#j/#k;
(+, -, , )
#i=SIN[#j];
#i=ASIN[#j]; The unit of angle is degree, and 90
#i=COS[#j];
Trigonometric functions #i=ACOS[#j]; degrees and 30 points will be
#i=TAN[#j]; expressed as 90.5 degrees.
#i=ATAN[#j]/[#k];
Square root
#i=SQRT[#j];
Absolute value #i=ABS[#j];
ROUND command can be
Round off #i=ROUND[#j];
#i=FIX[#j]; expressed as "RO".
Round down
#i=FUP[#j];
Unconditional carry

Logic operation #i=#j OR #k;

Logical operations will be
#i=#j XOR #k;
(OR, XOR, AND) #i=#j AND #k; performed in units of binary digits.

Explain:

 Angle units

The trigonometric functions (SIN, COS, ASIN, ACOS, TAN, ATAN) use angles in
degrees, for example: 90 degrees and 30 minutes in 90.5 degrees.

 Arc Sine Trigonometric Function：ARCSIN #i = ASIN[#j];

 The answer ranged from –90° to 90°.

 When the variable #j exceeds the range of -1~1, a warning is issued.

327 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

 In addition to the variable #j, constants can also be used.

 Arc cosine trigonometric function：ARCCOS #i = ACOS[#j];

 The answer ranged from 180° to 0°.

 When the variable #j exceeds the range of -1~1, a warning is issued.

 In addition to the variable #j, constants can also be used.

 Arctangent trigonometric function：ARCTAN #i = ATAN[#j]/[#k];

 Given both sides of the length, and separated by a slash（/）.

 The answer ranged from -180° to 180°. For example: Given #1 = ATAN[–1]/[–
1];When #1 為 -135.0.0。
 In addition to the variable #j, constants can also be used.

 Round/Fetch integers

 When mathematical or logical expressions such as IF or WHILE conditional

expressions contain rounded functions, the system rounds the calculations to
the first decimal place.
For example, in program line #1=ROUND[#2]; if #2 evaluates to 1.2345，the
result of #1 will be rounded off to 1.0.
 When rounding a function in an NC program, the value will be rounded off in
the least significant unit of the address.
For example: Suppose you want to write a drilling program and let it use the
values of the variables #1 and #2 to process it and then return to the original
position. If the system feed unit is 1/1000 mm, the value of variable #1 is
1.2346, and the value of variable #2 is 2.3456, then:

G00 G91 X–#1 ;move 1.235 mm

G01 X–#2 F300 ;move 2.346 mm
G00 X[#1+#2] ;Since 1.2345+2.3456=3.5801，the moving distance will be 3.580 and the tool will not return to the
original position

This difference comes from the fact that the added action is performed before or
after rounding. To return the tool to its original position, the instruction needs to

328 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

be written as G00X–[ROUND[#1]+ROUND[#2]]。

 unconditionally

In the controller system, if the absolute value of the integer generated by the
result of a certain number is smaller than the absolute value of the original
number, the operation is considered to be rounded down to an integer without
conditions. EX:

set #1=1.2 and #2=–1.2,

when execute #3=FIX[#1]，1.0 will be set to variable #3,
when execute #3=FIX[#2]，-1.0 will be set to variable #3.

 Unconditional carry

set #1=1.2 and #2=–1.2,

when execute #3=FUP[#1]，2.0 will be set to variable #3,
when execute #3=FUP[#2]，-2.0 will be set to variable #3.

5.2.4 Macro and NC Command Blocks

The following program lines will be treated as macro program lines:

 Program lines that contain math or logic operations (=).

 Contains program lines that control conditional expressions (such as GOTO、DO、
END).
 Program lines containing macro call instructions (G65).

Any other program line that is not a macro program line will be treated as an NC
program line.

329 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

5.2.5 Branch and Repetition

In the program, the flow of control can be changed using GOTO and IF statement, which
contains three branches and repeated operations:

GOTO statement (unconditional branch)

Branch and repeat: IF statement (conditional branch: if... then...)

WHILE statement (when ... repeat)

1. Unconditional branch (GOTO Statement)

Jumps to the branch with sequence number n. When the sequence number greater
than 1 to 99999 is specified, an alert message will pop up. In addition, the serial number
can also be specified by an equation.
GOTO n ;n is a serial number from 1 to 99999

Example:
GOTO1;
GOTO#10;

2. Conditional branch (IF Statement)

Specify a statement after IF.

 IF [<statement>] GOTOn
When the given statement expression is satisfied, it jumps to the branch with the
serial number n; if the statement expression is not satisfied, the next stroke
expression is executed.

IF[<statement>]GOTOn

330 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

 IF [<statement>] THEN
When a given statement expression is satisfied, a macro program line that was
previously given is executed and only a single macro program line is executed.

If the values of variables #1 and #2 are the same, the value of variable #3 will be set
to 0。
IF [#1 EQ #2] THEN#3=0;

 Explain

Statement

In the statement expression, there must be an operator between the two variables
or between the variable and the constant, and the statement expression must be
written in square brackets ([ ]). Besides the variable, the expression can also be used.

Operator

The operator consists of two English letters and is used to compare the size of the
two values.

Operator Function

EQ Equal (=)

NE Not equal (≠)

GT Greater than (>)

GE Greater than or equal to ()

LT Less than (<)

LE Less than or equal to ()

3. Repetition (WHILE Statement)

When the given condition is satisfied, the program beginning with DO begins with END.
If the given condition is not satisfied, execution will continue from the program line
after END.

331 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Repetition (WHILE Statement)

 Explain

When the given condition is satisfied, a program that start with "DO" and end by
"END" after "WHILE" is executed. If the given condition is not satisfied, execution will
continue from the program line after "END". Its format is the same as the "IF"
statement formula. The numbers following "DO" and "END" are the execution range
identifiers, which can be 1, 2, or 3. If other numbers are used, a warning message will
pop up.

 Multi-level execution

IDs (1~3) in the DO-END loop can be used multiple times, but please note that if the
program contains interlaced repeat loops (DO range overlaps), the system will pop
out of the alert message.

332 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Multi-level execution

5.2.6 Macro Call

The command to call the macro is G65.

 The difference between macro call and subroutine call

The differences between macro call (G65) and subroutine call (M98) are as follows:
 You can use the G65 command to specify arguments (data to be sent to macros), but
the M98 command cannot.
 Using the G65 instruction will change the hierarchy of regional variables in the macro.

333 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

1. Simple call (G65)

With G65, the macro given by address P will be called and data (arguments) can be sent
to this macro.

G65 Pp Ll <specify arguments>;

P ： The macro number to call

l ： repeat times
Arguments：Data to send to macros

Simple call (G65)

Explain:

calling

 Specify the macro number to be called with P code after G65.

 When repeated execution is required, the number 1 to 9999 is given in L code. When
L is not specified, it is preset to 1 time.
 By using an argument, you can specify a value for the corresponding intra-regional
macro variable.

Argument specification

Two types of arguments are provided. Arguments specify that I use letters other than
G, L, N, O, and P, and that only one letter can be used. Arguments specify II to use the
letters A, B, C one each and I, J, K up to 10 times. The type specified by the argument
will be determined by the letter used.

Argument specification I

The method specified by the argument is specified in English letters (addresses), as

shown in the following table:

334 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

address Variable number address Variable number address Variable number

A #1 I #4 T #20
B #2 J #5 U #21
C #3 K #6 V #22
D #7 M #13 W #23
E #8 Q #17 X #24
F #9 R #18 Y #25
H #11 S #19 Z #26

 The addresses G, L, N, O, P cannot be used to specify arguments.

 Addresses that do not need to be specified can be omitted. The intraregional macro
variable corresponding to the omitted address will be set to undefined.
 The writing of addresses does not need to follow the order of the English letters. It
only needs to follow the writing format of the address. However, if you use the
addresses I, J, and K, you still need to write them alphabetically.

Example:
B_A_D_ … J_K_ correct
B_A_D_ … J_I_ wrong

Argument specification II
Argument specification II can use address A, B, C, and I, J, K up to 10 times, and it is
used to send a value such as three-dimensional coordinate value as an argument.

address Variable number address Variable number address Variable number

A #1 K3 #12 J7 #23
B #2 I4 #13 K7 #24
C #3 J4 #14 I8 #25
I1 #4 K4 #15 J8 #26
J1 #5 I5 #16 K8 #27
K1 #6 J5 #17 I9 #28
I2 #7 K5 #18 J9 #29
J2 #8 I6 #19 K9 #30
K2 #9 J6 #20 I10 #31
I3 #10 K6 #21 J10 #32
J3 #11 I7 #22 K10 #33

335 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Arguments specify mixed use of I and II

The CNC controller automatically recognizes arguments of the specified type I and II
internally. If the argument specifies that both types I and II are used at the same time,
the type is specified using the argument that is specified later.

Arguments specify mixed use of I and II

2. Continuous active call (G66)

The command to continue an active call is G66, and the macro defined by G66 will be
called after the program line of the axis move instruction is executed. This state will
continue until the G67 command cancels.

G66 Pp Ll <specify arguments>;

P : The macro number to call

l : Repeats (default is 1)
Arqument : Data to send to macros

Continue active call (G66)

Explain:

336 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Call

 The P code after G66 specifies program number for calling.

 How many times to call program will specify by L and from 1 to 9999.
 Arguments will pass to macro same as G65

Cancel

G67 will abort G66 mode, and continue active call will not effect.

Multi levels calling

G65 and G66 can call other G65 or G66 for multi levels calling, but only max 4 levels
allowing, but not including subprogram calling (M98).

Limit

 G66 program can not call macro program.

 G66 must before argument.
 Except motion commands, can not call macro.
 Variable of macro (argument) only can set on G66 block.

5.2.7 Example

1. G65 example

The macro 9010 simulates the G81 drilling cycle.

Main program:
G90G54G17G40G49G80
G10.65
G91G28Z
G90
G00XY
G00Z20.

#50=10. ; X position
#51=10. ; Y position
#52=-20. ; Z Lower tool position
#53=3. ; Z reference point position
#54=200. ; feed speed

337 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

#55=3. ; Spindle forward rotation (M3)

#56=2000. ; Spindle S code

G65 P9010 X#50 Y#51 Z#52 R#53 F#54 M#55 S#56

G11.65
M5
M30

Macro program 9010.CNC：

O9010
;THE SUBPROGRAM SIMULATES G81

G90G54G17G40G49G80

S#19
M#13
G00 X#24 Y#25
G00 Z#18
G01 Z#52 F#9
G00 Z#18

M99

2. G66 example

Main program:
;G66 USED SAMPLE
G90G54G17G40G49G80
G10.65
G91G28Z0.
G90
G00 X0.Y0.
G00 Z20.

#52=-20. ; A hole depth

#53=3. ; Z reference point position
#54=200. ; Feed rate
#55=3. ; M3 spindle forward rotation
#56=2000. ; Spindle speed
G66 P9011 Z#52 R#53 F#54 M#55 S#56 ; Given subroutine
G00 X0. Y0.
G00 X10.
G00 Y10.
G00 X0.
G67

G11.65
M5

Macro program 9011.CNC：

O9011
G90G54G17G40G49G80
S#19
M#13
G00Z#18
G01Z#52F#9
G00Z#18
M99

338 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

5.2.8 Added/Modified Functions

 File System

Added \MSYS\MCNC system file folder to store system files, PLC subroutine file (file
starting with "PLC-") and file name 9000~9999. This folder is a hidden folder, so users
will not see all system files.

In order to manage these hidden system files, a submenu "System File" is added to the
"System Management" menu of the Machine Parameters menu, which includes the
"Open Old Files", "Archive", "Rename Files", and "Delete Files" functions. If the
mechanic needs to maintain the system file, these options must be used without the
option "F2 → File". Based on system security factors, you must log in to security level 2
or higher.

System Management Menu

To save the system file directly to the CNC controller, use the FTP transfer function to
upload the system file to be stored in the controller to the \MSYS\MCNC system file
folder.

339 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

FTP

Note 1: Refer to INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) Integrate manual for details

on the machine parameter settings.
Note 2: For further information about authorization level, please refer to Safety
Level.

 Calling subprogram

(1) In macro mode B, the address P is added before the name of the subprogram in
the M98 command line. For example, if the subprogram file name is 9100, then:
Macro mode Format

A M98 9100

B M98 P9100

(2) When executing the M98 command, the control system pushes the currently used
macro mode state into the stack. When M99 is executed, it will pop up again from
the stack, so that the macro mode status can be restored.

 A status page is added at the same time for the user to view the defined/undefined
status of the regional variables in the macro set of macro mode B. The user can press

340 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

ALT+F8 to switch to the system diagnosis page, and then use ALT+F3 to switch to
the macro mode B status page. Please note that the macro mode B status page will
only be displayed when macro mode B is used. If the macro mode B status page is
not displayed, macro mode A is currently used.

Type B Macro State

Note 1: For details on operation and description of the system diagnosis page, refer
to INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) integrate manual.
Note 2: G65 call subroutines number up to 6 layers.

341 / 353
INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

342 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

6 FTP File Transfer

INCON-M470/M670/M675 serves as a FTP server as well. Local computers can connect

to the controller through standard Ethernet to upload or download files in the
controller storage space or the USB flash drive. To do FTP file transferring, local
computers must install FTP software beforehand. (For relevant information please visit:
https://filezilla-project.org)

FTP can be used to transfer files to the CNC controller. There are many client programs
available on the PC. For example: FileZilla (for usage and information, see:
https://filezilla-project.org)

When using FTP to transfer files, enter the user name and password of this level
according to the security level 1~3, as shown in the following table:

FTP Default User ID Password Visible Folder

Authorization level 1 INTEK User Password /MUSER

Default setting is /MUSER, if

specific items are selected in
Authorization level 2 SYSTEM System Password "Management" dialog box, the
visible folder will be /MSYS and
/MUSER.

Authorization level 3 ADMIN Ultimate Password /MSYS, /MUSER

Note: After logging in using the security level 2 account password, the default visible
folder is /MUSER, but if the machine parameters are loaded in advance in the
"System Management → Management" dialog box of the machine
parameter menu, the loading M4PLC32 is enabled. If any one of the DLM or
update system is used to log in using the security level 2 password, you can
see the /MSYS and /MUSER folders.

Please note: That the original CNC file will be overwritten when transferring the file,
so pay attention to whether the program file is being executed.

343 / 353
INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

344 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

7 Alarms

When CNC controller meets odd situation, it will right away show alarm and
information, categorize as below:

7.1 Fatal System Alarms

Code Warning Message Solution

Please turn off the system and wait 10 seconds

System check sum error. before restart. If there are still problems, please
CNC self-diagnosis found problem. contact the maintenance staff and reinstall the
controller software.

Problem with machine control, according to page

501 PLC alarm instruction to resolve the problem or contact
manufacturer.

Close for 10 seconds and re-open, if problem

514 X position control loop fail continue, please check X, Y, Z, A, B, C axis servo
driver, motor and connection to be correct or not.

515 Y axis servo position loop not normal Same as 514.

516 Z axis servo position loop not normal Same as 514.

517 A axis servo position loop not normal Same as 514.

According to PLC dealing with emergency machine

PLC Alarm (EMG input is on)
518 stop, it could be due to e.g. EMG button is pressed,
Emergency stop
motor or servo motor driver is broken.

X, Y, Z, A, B, C axis servo system cannot follow, many

519 X axis not in-position time out
reason can cause it. Resolution same as above.

520 Y axis not in-position time out Same as 519.

521 Z axis not in-position time out Same as 519.

522 A axis not in-position time out Same as 519.

Machine control parameter got problem, please

Machine parameter error, please load
531 inform machine manufacturer or retailer's
backup file
maintenance people to re-enter.

Rigid tapping spindle motor close loop Check the motor driver, is the motor and cable
546
not working normal properly connected.

345 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

7.2 Axial Motion Alarms

Code Warning Message Solution

The software limit set for the axis,

please check the machine parameter's
506 X axis positive side soft limit tripped software limit setting to be correct or if
the working program has surpassed
soft limit.

507 X axis negative side soft limit tripped Same as 506.

508 Y axis positive side soft limit tripped Same as 506.

509 Y axis negative side soft limit tripped Same as 506.

510 Z axis positive side soft limit tripped Same as 506.

511 Z axis negative side soft limit tripped Same as 506.

512 A axis positive side soft limit tripped Same as 506.

513 A axis negative side soft limit tripped Same as 506.

547 B axis positive side soft limit tripped Same as 506.

548 B axis negative side soft limit tripped Same as 506.

549 C axis positive side soft limit tripped Same as 506.

550 C axis negative side soft limit tripped Same as 506.

The axis has touched limited switch.

Please check whether the work has
523 X axis positive side limit tripped
surpassed the limit of the switch
position.

524 X axis negative side limit tripped Same as 523.

525 Y axis positive side limit tripped Same as 523.

526 Y axis negative side limit tripped Same as 523.

527 Z axis positive side limit tripped Same as 523.

528 Z axis negative side limit tripped Same as 523.

529 A axis positive side limit tripped Same as 523.

530 A axis negative side limit tripped Same as 523.

555 B axis positive side limit tripped Same as 523.

556 B axis negative side limit tripped Same as 523.

557 C axis positive side limit tripped Same as 523.

346 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Code Warning Message Solution

558 C axis negative side limit tripped Same as 523.

X axis over travel limit, position is lost, Please do

542 Act according to instruction.
home after recover

Y axis over travel limit, position is lost, Please do

543 Same as 542.
home after recover

Z axis over travel limit, position is lost, Please do

544 Same as 542.
home after recover

A axis over travel limit, position is lost, Please do

545 Same as 542.
home after recover

B axis over travel limit, position is lost,

559 Same as 542.
Please do home after recover

C axis over travel limit, position is lost,

560 Same as 542.
Please do home after recover

1. Please check the wiring and confirm

the connection of the home process
index signal.
2. Please adjust the home process
566 X axis home process index over limit
index offset distance to shorten the
index searching distance. The index
searching distance 400 ~ 900μ is
recommended.

567 Y axis home process index over limit Same as 566.

568 Z axis home process index over limit Same as 566.

569 A axis home process index over limit Same as 566.

570 B axis home process index over limit Same as 566.

571 C axis home process index over limit Same as 566.

7.3 Other Fatal Alarms

Code Warning Message Solution

Program error; please check G codes in the

505 Internal error
program.

532 Please do homing first Return to home as instructed.

347 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Code Warning Message Solution

When G37 touch the probe for the first

time and Z axis has been pulled up, check
533 Tool signal detected in none tool area
if probe signal is continue working and if
there are probe error.

534 Cannot detect tool signal Same as 533.

538 Please first do Z axis homing Get axis to home.

539 Please first do Y axis homing Same as 538.

540 Please first do X axis homing Same as 538.

PLC send out, detail please see error

600 PLC warning
message dialog box.

System error, please provide CNC

Out of memory, Divide by zero error, Exception program to INTEK Technology for
error reference, to find the error and conduct
change.

7.4 General Alarms

Code Warning Message Solution

001 Command error Command error, please see instruction.

Sub program is calling sub program, allow no

002 M95 call sub program loop surpass 8
more then 8 level.

003 M97 call sub program loop surpass 8 Same as 002.

004 M98 call sub program loop surpass 8 Same as 002.

005 M95 format error Program error.

006 M97 command require sub program M97 lacks sub program number.

M98 command need vice program file

007 M98 lacks sub program name.
name

This is not a sub program, can't Lack main program to execute sub program,
008
execute M99 please write main program.

This place cannot change coordinate Tool compensation cannot change coordinate
009
plan plan.

010 Homing not done Please return to home first.

MDI does not allow tool compensation

011 Can't do compensation here
command.

348 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Code Warning Message Solution

Has not yet execute G28 or G30, cannot

012 G29 must have G28 or G30 setting middle point.
execute G29

Tool compensation cannot repeat

014 Tool compensation has been working
to G41/G42 command.

Because G68 is working, can't

015 G68 not cancel can't have G51.
execute G51

Because G68 not yet cancel, can't When G51 have G68, must first
016
execute G50 cancel G69 can G50 be use to cancel G51.

Error G52 command, must have at least

017 G code error.
one X, Y, Z or A

Only G01 can execute the angle Can only allow G01 to do angel chamfering or
018
chamfering or corner rounding corner rounding.

Mirror functional is working plan related, must

019 Error mirror axis
first choice correct plan.

020 Must set working plan Same as 019.

Other tool radius compensation is at Cannot repeat G41/G42 within tool radius
021
work compensation.

Tool length compensation has been

022 Tool length compensation cannot repeat G43.
working

Train in tool radius compensation must Only allow G00/G01 to train in or train out tool
023
be G00 or G01 compensation mode

Train out tool radius compensation

024 Same as 023.
order must be G00 or G01

Within tool radius compensation or

Angle chamfering, corner rounding or tool
while angle chamfering or corner
027 radius compensation, not allow third or fourth
rounding, third axis motion is not
axis to move.
allowed

Within tool radius compensation or

while angle chamfering or corner
028 Same as 027.
rounding, forth axis motion is not
allowed

Within tool radius compensation,

Tool radius compensation, after arc cutting not
029 behind G02/G03 it cannot follow the
allowing single command for full circle cutting.
command of the full circle

Within tool radius compensation, full Tool radius compensation, if a single order for
030 circle command cannot be follow by full circle cutting command, afterwards must
interpolate command finish tool radius compensation, cannot

349 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Code Warning Message Solution

continue interpolate command.

031 Wrong MDI command Correct MDI command.

032 Wrong H code H value range 1~128.

033 Wrong T code T value surpass tool umber limit.

034 Wrong M code M value range 0~99.

035 Wrong G code G code error.

Because of compensation function is at G41/G42 does not allow change tool radius
036
work, this place cannot change D value compensation value.

While executing DNC program, cannot call sub

037 Wrong DNC command
program. So, don't accept M95/M97/M98/M99.

038 Can cycle must have reference point Within can cycle, R reference value is missing.

Because can cycle not yet completed, Press F10 to finish execution and automatically
039
cannot cancel cancel can cycle.

Because compensation is at work the Within tool radius compensation, if MDI pause,
040
place cannot has MDI not allowing axis movement command.

041 Within G94 mode can't execute G33 G94 does not allow G33 execution.

042 Lack dug depth Within cycle forgot to give Z value depth.

G87 order must have

043 G87 order, forgot to give R position value.
reference positioning

G87 order must be at G98 mode to

044 G87 order cannot execute within G99 mode.
execute

Tool radius compensation can't execute Tool radius compensation does not accept can
045
can cycle cycle.

Because the execution can cycle or

Can cycle or pocket cycle, does not allow MDI
046 pocket cycle, MDI cannot execute the
command.
command

047 Scale mirror at work G51 not cancel, can't give G51.

048 Rotation at work G68 not cancel can't give G68.

Similar to exception error problem, please

049 Memory not enough provide CNC program to Intek Technology for
reference, to find the error.

050 G53 must work under G90 mode G53 can only operate under G90.

When the system is executing, the program run

Within the "run—from start", G37 can't
051 from start cannot allow G37 tool length
be executed
command.

350 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Code Warning Message Solution

Before executing G37 must assign tool Before G37 tool length testing, first select the
052
number tool from H value.

Circle pocket cycle requires radius

053 Circle pocket cycle, missing radius value.
setting

Rectangular pocket cycle requires Rectangular pocket cycle, missing length and
054
length and wide setting width high (u, v, w) value.

Pocket cycle requires setting of each cut

055 Pocket cycle requires Q value.
with Q distance

056 Pocket cycle requires centre setting Pocket cycle missing centre (x, y, z) value.

Pocket cycle requires moving direction

057 Need G02/G03 to know direction to dig.
setting

Run from start mode, cannot

058 G88 need manual cooperation.
execute G88

Pocket cycle depth smaller then

059 accuracy depth, please check depth Check if the program is normal.
number direction and sign

Pocket cycle total size smaller then

060 Check if the program is normal.
precision cut thickness

When machine lock or spindle lock, Can't detect tool when Machine lock or spindle
061
cannot execute G37 lock.

Tool radius compensation or tool length

062 Reference G92 note.
compensation, cannot execute G92

063 Rigid tapping require S code Rigid tapping must instruct S code.

064 Rigid tapping S value too big S value must be reasonable size.

Max rigid tapping spindle speed is 0, so,

065 S value must be reasonable size.
executing tapping cannot

066 Wrong D code D value must be between 1~128.

Pocket cycle requires spindle cutting

067 G70/G71 order must give I value.
speed

While executing pocket cycle, tool Tool compensation table's tool radius value
068
radius cannot be 0 must be set.

069 Corner rounding's radius too big Corner rounding radius must be reasonable.

Dowel radius and external radius too

070 Dowel's concave must be larger than tool radius.
small

071 Must set external length Reference dowel cycle.

072 Must set external wide Reference dowel cycle.

351 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Code Warning Message Solution

073 External too small Reference dowel cycle.

074 Must set inside or outside side milling Reference dowel cycle.

075 Hole drilling info not enough Reference drilling menu.

Final stop value smaller then initiating

076 Reference drilling menu.
spot

077 Must set starting angel Reference drilling menu.

078 Command value too big Value must be smaller than 9 digits.

079 Fine cutting width too big Fine value must be reasonable size.

Hole drilling mode value must be larger

080 Drilling value can't be 0.
than 0

The next two block's tool compensation Tool radius compensation can't be done, line
081
will over cut the piece smaller then tool radius.

The tool radius compensation, missing

082 Reference tool radius note item.
next section command

Command certain number sign must be

083 Check the order.
positive

084 Wrong can cycle command Check the cycle order.

Program wrongs plan of corresponding

085 Check pocket cycle and dowel cycle.
spindle's parallel axis

G76 and G87 need to provide axis offset

086 Reference G76 or G87 explain.
of spindle stop

087 The sharp is not closing path Reference G70.1x instruction.

091 Wrong sharp command Reference G70.1x instruction.

When set direction tracking is at work,

095 Reference G71.0x instruction.
there can't be a fourth axis action

If desire to use direction tracking, fourth

096 Reference G71.0x instruction.
axis must function

097 Wrong object instruction Reference G70.2x instruction.

Object module number must larger than

098 Reference G70.2x instruction.
0

099 Arc object module must set circle centre Reference G70.2x instruction.

When system is executing, pause not

101 done by M00/M01, but MDI can only According to panel instructs MDI explanation.
have M, S, T code

Sub program must stop according

102 According to fixed sub program.
to M99

352 / 353
 INCON-M470(S)/M670(S)/M675(S) User Manual

Code Warning Message Solution

103 Hard disk error Check hard drive.

104 Wrong info in setting instruction Correct info order.

105 Information setting mode initiated Initiate info setting mode.

7.5 Special Exception Error

When a special exception error occurs in the system, the system will enter the exception
handler, shut down the entire system, and display the relevant information as shown
below.

Exception Error Information (Take INCON-M675 for Example)

You can take the picture of the controller and send it to the customer support staff to
make an exception error and then turn off the power.

353 / 353